Home

Xante FilmMaker 4 Printer

1. Fig 1 30 Printer Ports Selecting the Printer Interface Connect to the printer appropriate interface for your host computer or network environment With a parallel connection the PC to printer distance for a PC without Ethernet should be less than 10 ft 3 m With an Ethernet connection you need a UTP connection Required Equipment Parallel Use a bi directional or IEEE 1284 parallel printer cable to connect your PC and printer fig 1 31 via the parallel port The cable s printer end has a 36 pin male connector the computer end has a 25 pin male connector 36 pin Connector 25 pin Connector To Printer To Host Computer Fig 1 31 Parallel Cable See Parallel Connection in chapter 3 for details on connecting this cable to the printer and your computer 1 18 Introduction and Installation Required Equipment Ethernet Use a CAT 5 Ethernet cable with RJ45 connectors Ethernet Port RJ 45 Connector Fig 1 32 Connect to Ethernet Port R You can connect two Ethernet devices together bypassing a hub using a crossover DA patch cable where pin 1 is crossed to pin 3 and pin 2 is crossed to pin 6 See Port Connection Ethernet Port in chapter 2 for details on connecting this cable to the printer and your computer Required Equipment USB In a PC environment use a USB Universal Serial Bus cable to connect a PC to the printer fig 1 33 via the USB port Connector Connector To Host Comput
2. ONLINE READY C DATA MANUAL DUPLEX Control Keys Online Ready LED is on when the printer is ready to receive data It is off when an engine error occurs Data LED is on and does not blink when the printer is receiving data Blinking indicates that the printer is processing data Manual LED is on when the multipurpose feeder is selected Duplex LED is not functional on the FilmMaker 4 printer Front panel control keys allow you to configure some printer features and to access the configuration menus ONLINE ko oOo DUPLEX RESET 4 2 Configuration Online key is used to take the printer on and off line The window reads Ready Idle when the printer is on line or Offline if it is off line The printer must be on line to receive data from your computer Form Feed key allows you to feed a blank page through the printer Some applications do not issue a form feed command at the end of a page If this happens take the printer off line and press the Form Feed key after a blank page feeds press the Online key to put the printer back on line Tray Select key allows you to change the default paper tray Press once to display the current tray selection Press the Tray Select key to toggle between the available trays Duplex key is not functional on the FilmMaker 4 printer Reset key allows you to return to the previous menu level when using configuration menus To cancel a
3. Porras ter Was RATE Parte Hamm Pop amire il ms AMETE Pee verae we meme A eos Mo ar Suet AHT Poncium Qo Tai Parson Ure e Cronin Lager Ratatat binaga BLAB i d E e Toir Oe warm f fe ta maa HC Morath Eresirpa Fig 2 14 Setup Window Fig 2 15 Check Paper Size Window 9 Goto File Print When the Print window appears fig 2 16 select Printer Features from the drop down menu These are your available print options All features are listed as available in version 10 1 5 However they are only available if the feature is installed on your printer Lr mr E Site UH Boma m QUON Posh T lame Hu ami E ux Taie Media om fame js Cops Fur inma laije m pud frami mM p yis Brim BU Reim Dni m Fopr Fred T Co Lam el Exes Faden anu CI E LES z A Tama mm f Pr Fien Erm ties etinm rir P ceu J a Fig 2 16 Print Window Fig 2 17 Printer Features Window 2 8 Macintosh Setup 10 Select the appropriate options from the drop down menus on the Printer Features window fig 2 17 See Configuring Printer Options later in this chapter for a description of your printer s options 11 Select Paper Feed from the Print window drop down menu 2 16 When the paper feed options appear fig 2 18 select the desired media source AY To print from a manual feed tray or a multipurpose tray select ManualFeed Ly NOTE Erme t
4. is unusually thick thin wrinkled torn curled creased wet damp or otherwise damaged is coated synthetically reinforced colored with surface treatment or heavily textured has metal clasps strings staples cutouts perforations or windows has exposed adhesives or is a partial sheet of labels or a sheet on which the glue has soaked through the labels A Using media that does not meet these guidelines may void your printer warranty XANTE is not responsible for damages caused by media Repair will be at the user s expense To prevent damage to media store media e in small flat stacks not set on its side or end in the original wrapper in a location with a temperature range from 50 to 86 F 10 to 30 C and a stable relative humidity from 30 to 65 Media Selecting Handling and Printing 5 1 ina dark area do not expose it to direct sunlight Media Sizes Your printer allows you to use media from 3 94 x 5 83 100 mm x 148 mm up to 13 00 x 35 50 330 mm x 902 mm See Media Sources later in this chapter about which source to use with specific media sizes Imageable Area Physical page size is different from the imageable area The portion of a physical page on which the printer can lay down toner is the imageable area The following chart lists imageable areas produced by the XANTE Series 4 printers for many standard media sizes Media Sizes Imageable Areas Letter 8 50 x 11 00 8 34 x
5. 000 vi Table of Contents Chapter 1 Introduction and InstallatiOnc ccsaccsscseicseseddeesssscasersontdceseiatine 1 1 FilmMaket MET T EAA 1 1 About this EL TR E E EERE O 1 1 Manual C ODVelblOD esses asasena eaen ee REE RE eE KEUR AE RR EUKKK ERU IKK ERRARE E KRAKER UU 1 3 Printer FeatUte Sosine oa i i eE E EEEE E EE 1 4 ICE P E A A E 1 5 Printer LOcati N p TEM 1 6 geniis co o E NA 1 6 Printer VEL VIEW sisvescisicivetispossconpeodscsuscsspatescosscbepeniscsuscsipaespetduenendcdudcsdededlie 1 8 Toner Cartridge MM RENAN 1 8 Handling tie Toner Cartridge so isscissuisesusssuiiscsaiinaesdtinbeteschepteacteinteactuacteanteds 1 8 Removing and Installing the Toner Cartridge euin ttes 1 9 Sta datd CASS UU M 1 11 Mul p rpo e Feeder prasscxvacxnsccmsasnnivancensucancessnsicn scan ensancneensannbsnsawsiansinrssenteiinn 1 13 Mul p rpose Feeder Tipene ereina aieeaii eieiei eerie aeaieie 1 15 Connecting the Power Cord aeiisssasevssanswisssisvncanccvantennivantasanxancssanseninsancesincnevinch 1 15 Turning the Printer ST T 1 16 Turning the Printer COP cs vxiccxsscsasdxnnasasisosvasavlevisnsickovanstvhacunnivkananessincamnsuniesantevases 1 17 Printing dg Startup Page sieisen aeaeaei 1 17 Printer Ports OVEIVIEW T 1 18 Selecting the Printer In erf tB ueniet quete na eee eE E EREE 1 18 Required Equipment
6. 4 13 Halftone Calibration Technology Grit ssisionsdsssinnedsossnasdieansanvinaninionns 4 13 n uH ET E AEE 4 14 Titer see tC OHEPD aao Ned ma Do SEA NOE HH NAME Mad Eo BLAN E 4 15 IP Address Net Mask and Gateway Configuration 4 15 nier e O X 4 15 DHCP D 4 15 Jani RECOVERS E E EE A A AA AA AA AA AA A TET 4 15 L tiouace OPHONS sirsnsecsainscuntnucatnecpardecaainecuntnusadineeuarducaaiaecuuatusadinscaardecaasaacaden 4 16 Lines Per Inch EPD cicissssesestesseesstersseaetesconasdvecevordsoseuastovetsbedesesesedeaveeasduetsusass 4 16 DUEOUEE DEus bun ax Up pu pups p quad E uu pp up Su QM 4 16 Media Weis DE uel bises OE MEER E DELL DEOR EOD RELATA RON 4 17 Mirror Pi PM t 4 17 Multipurpose Feeder Media Sizes Manual Feed 1 4 17 Negative cann MM 4 18 Negative Enhanced Imaging Technology NEIT sss 4 18 iz O 4 19 lg 4 19 Printer Eme adden Draper prece eiut iuter dendi ena teem bea bac Dui brsane 4 19 PENR L NN ME NM M A RD UR 4 20 Resolution Options DED scuccssssapsssvnssponerasvensenarusnscunnansnnonsaninavsssupensuspepeaesen 4 20 Smoot Shading qc tetuer pac boe br obe pe Ae uH o br RH er ege 4 20 Sod SOLO T E TT 4 21 Spot Function Enhanced
7. Media may not meet the requirements in Media Specifications in chapter 5 If necessary replace the media See Standard Cassette and Multipurpose Feeder in chapter 1 The toner cartridge may need replacing See Toner Cartridge in chapter 1 Troubleshooting 8 5 Vertical black streaks appear on the printed media e The toner cartridge may need replacing See Toner Cartridge in chapter 1 rint Repetitive defects appear on the printed media e The paper path may be dirty Print several blank sheets to clean the path If necessary clean the printer See Cleaning the rinter Printer in chapter 6 Use the cassette cover to prevent dust and debris from settling on the media and getting into the printer HN Toner may have settled in the cartridge Remove and shake it gently to redistribute the toner See Redistributing Toner in chapter 4 e The toner cartridge may need replacing See Toner Cartridge in chapter 1 Some characters are missing or only partially printed e Media may not meet the requirements in Media Specifications in chapter 5 If necessary replace the media See Standard Cassette P inte and Multipurpose Feeder in chapter 1 e The toner cartridge may need replacing See Toner Cartridge in chapter 1 6 6 Troubleshooting Toner on the printed media smears when rubbed Printed Media may be damp or otherwise damaged Make sure medi
8. Select Printer Configuration Print Quality EP1 fig 2 110 The Default EP1 window appears fig 2 111 3 Select the type of media for which you want to set the EPI from the Media Type drop down menu fig 2 111 Then Click Change 4 Select the EPI settings from the EPI field fig 2 111 Options are 0 up to 15 The default setting depends on the selected media The default for paper and film is 10 Then click Change 5 Close the browser Fuser Temperature Fuser Temperature allows you to change your printer s default fuser temperature settings for each media type Macintosh Setup 2 53 1 Goto the printer home page fig 2 112 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 2 112 Printer Home Page Fig 2 113 Default Fuser Temperature Window 2 Select Printer Configuration Print Quality Fuser Temperature fig 2 112 The Default Fuser Temperature window appears fig 2 113 3 Select the type of media for which you want to set the temperature from the Media Type drop down menu fig 2 113 Then Click Change 4 Select the desired temperature for the media selected in step 3 from the Fuser Temperature drop down menu fig 2 113 Options are 0 none to 15 hot Select 0 none or 1 when printing to Myriad film envelopes and paper Select hotter settings for heavy paper and heavy film Then click Change 5 Close the browser y You also can set the fuser temperature th
9. a HEU tur IP etm opa up Ie Np qub ee e ARR i e RETI P PT Pemeri m is risa teem sa asf pee oe a a amaa rn GEID el ee a ss Fig 3 44 Select Printer Port Window 6 Select appropriate port fig 3 44 them click Next The Install Printer Software window appears fig 3 45 LPT1 is XANTE s recommended printer port but you can create a new port if desired Simply follow the on screen instructions for each port you wish to create fig 3 44 7 Highlight your printer and click Next fig 3 45 The Use Existing Driver window appears PC Setup 3 23 Il dim ie caben kw mers ens nam anos cmn i eme p Par DASE Poir Linc r Vama mura sara ins rs em E L ae m pria ee SS ee a pe gt ge Drm nim eee eee corrum mpm Pn e za 2 BH Fra ee fs ee sma mm tes Fig 3 46 Use Existing Driver Window Fig 3 47 Printer Name Window 8 Select the driver option you wish to use It is recommended to keep the existing driver but you can replace it with a newer one if you desire then click Next The Printer Name window appears fig 3 47 9 Type your printer s name in the white box and set your printer s default option fig 3 47 The Printer Sharing window appears fig 3 48 meer EZ neret r tea m ee oe umm Gumi g lagueplcur km mcm Ga dl ctam p um miti Ee i ER m t pi m mm LI ERSLLUL apa a TAN dtc uem ON omm rmm Ea T bars umm Uo zh mo ij inn Bab
10. C The IP Information Page fig 3 147 lists On Type IPAddress NetworkAddress GatewayAddress BroadcastAddress IPAddressDynamic TransmitEncapsulation and Physical settings Fig 3 147 IP Information Page Fig 3 148 IPP Information Page d The IPP Information Page fig 3 148 lists On Type Enabled Interpreter DelayedOutputClose PrinterControl HasNames and OutputDevice settings PC Setup 3 67 e The LPR Information Page fig 3 149 lists On Type Enabled Interpreter DelayedOutputClose PrinterControl Filtering PrintHost HasNames OutputDevice ReceiveWindowSize and SendWindowsSize settings TT ae Fi i ETIIPIISL i 1 Beebe efi n um mium ke id diaria im a araa JERAJ et Fig 3 149 LPR Information Page Fig 3 150 Parallel Information Page f The Parallel Information Page fig 3 150 lists On Type Enabled Protocol DelayedOutputClose Interpreter PrinterControl HasNames Handshake nAckPulseWidth nStrobeExpectedPulseWidth and OutputDevice settings g The USB Information Page fig 3 151 lists On Type Enabled Protocol DelayedOutputClose Interpreter PrinterControl HasNames and OutputDevice settings Fig 3 151 USB Information Page 4 Close the browser Installed Options The Installed Options option allows you to check the installation status of your print s options 3 68 PC Setup 1 Go to the printer home page
11. Fig 3 58 Printers Window 98 Me Fig 3 59 Printers Faxes Window NT 2000 XP 2 Select your printer s icon fig 3 58 or 3 59 Then select File Properties The Properties window appears fig 3 60 Priel Fisserian Bik Geel Dems Foe meer Fn Dewt srm Bene O wem eit precenep n E kno Wh Deer utm I B arms Ta Tras Amerie L a Bupa Tug Lee Pied Feed Lier dl Pent spate ice Tate amp crglabie Prine Memory Biel IE Cugat Barani oe Sere TEL eren Paci Ds i Sar CTRL Shier Coch Jak Tay Somer iniy fant co Posriccpt me big Career d Gron aies by Poser Gee bi chi Dura Carency Syed kg Peck Pera rg Sok Timea Goel eel eem E Pram Fart Se eid aa Cee 00 pe Lm dr Ip ad SE Dg Fig 3 60 Device Options Tab 98 Me Fig 3 61 Device Settings Tab NT 2000 XP 3 Click the Device Options tab Windows 98 Me fig 3 60 or the Device Settings tab Windows NT 2000 XP fig 3 61 Select the appropriate upgrade from the corresponding drop down menu using the following procedure for you working environment This example illustrates reconfiguring the PPD after installing the optional feeder and tray PC Setup 3 29 5 a Windows 98 Me Highlight Optional Tray in the Installable Options window fig 3 60 then select Installed from the drop down menu under Change setting for and click OK The Printers window reappears fig 3 58 b Window NT 2000 XP Select Installed under the Install
12. PC Setup 3 9 8 Select Yes I want to view the ReadMe file fig 3 18 then click Finish When the file opens read it and then close it The Main Screen window appears fig 3 20 Select Exit or close the Main Screen The Web Registration window appears fig 3 21 Web Registration v Register Your Printer Online iam EXIT Ez E Fig 3 20 Main Screen Fig 3 21 Web Registration Window 9 Select Yes or No fig 3 21 Then go to the appropriate following step a Ifyou selected Yes the Registration Form window appears fig 3 22 Fill out and submit the form Fig 3 22 Registration Form b Ifyouselect No you return to the Windows desktop Configuring the PPD If you selected Yes to configure your printer in Installing AdobePS Printer Driver and Printer PPD some of the following PPD options are set already In this case simply verify those settings and make new ones required in this procedure 3 10 PC Setup 1 Select Start Settings Printers The Printers window appears 2 Highlight your printer and click the right mouse button Select Properties from the drop down menu 3 Click the Device Options tab highlight the option in the Installable Options section and then select the setting under Change Setting fig 3 23 Hod emailed Fig 3 23 Device Options Tab a Select Installed for the Optional Tray optional paper feeder if that upgrade was added to your printer
13. Adobe PostScript 3 and Adobe PostScript Level 2 support Full ColorSync 2 1 support Simplified printer setup and printing interface Ability to change printers from the Print dialog box Collation to print multiple document copies as opposed to multiple groups of the same page Reverse order printing to control the order in which the document pages are printed Poster printing of enlarged pages on multiple sheets that can be combined to create a poster Manual duplexing to split a print job into two segments one for printing one side of the document the second to print the other side Booklet printing to create brochure like printouts OpenType fonts support using Adobe Type Manager 4 6 Transverse option support for printers supporting custom page sizes Support for PostScript printers with a Universal Serial bus XANT FilmMaker 4 PPD Manual Installation Depending on your operating system your printer s PPD is either in the OS8 9 Printer Descriptions folder or the OSX XanteUtilities folder This file provides software applications access to printer specific features To load the printer PPD manually 1 Insert the XANTE Utilities CD ROM into your Macintosh When the Main Installation window appears close it and the setup program Macintosh Setup 2 17 2 Double click the Utilities CD ROM icon 3 Go to the OS8_9 Printer Descriptions folder 4 Drag the XANTE FilmMaker 4 file for your printer into the System Folder Extens
14. Change Reset the Password If you wish to change your password or have forgotten it you can reset it by using the following sequence from the Printer Security options fig 2 152 LOGIN LOGOUT LOGIN HOME LOGIN SET PASSWORD Simply go these pages in this order to reset your password Then follow the steps on how to set the password from the previous section Utility Pages The Utility Pages option allows you to print the following four utility pages Start Page prints a page with basic printer information such as the printer s current name resolution page count amount of installed RAM number of resident fonts EtherTalk and LPR status and the Ethernet and IP addresses Low Toner Page prints a toner reorder form which you can fill out and return to XANT or to your XANT vendor Network Page prints a page listing current network EtherTalk IP IPP LPR and Ethernet physical settings Font List Page prints a list of the Adobe PostScript 3 fonts resident on your XANT PostScript 3 printer Font Sample Page prints samples of Adobe PostScript 3 fonts resident on your XANT PostScript 3 printer 2 66 Macintosh Setup Menu Layout prints a page listing the front panel menus and their current settings 1 Goto the printer home page fig 2 154 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 2 154 Printer Home Page Fig 2 155 Utilities Pages Window 2 Select Utility Pages f
15. Maintenance and Specifications 6 9 XANTE s on site service plan provides maintenance service performed at your location by a trained technician With this plan if you are within 50 miles of the nearest authorized service center a trained service technician is dispatched to your site by the end of the next business day to begin servicing your printer For details on these plans or to request service under one of these plans call XANTE Customer Support at 800 926 8839 US and Canada or your XANTE vendor Limited Warranty XANTE CORPORATION warrants this product against defects in material and workmanship for a period of ONE 1 YEAR from the date of original purchase of the FilmMaker 4 series printer In case of defect XANTE CORPORATION will at its option repair or replace this product at no charge to you provided you return the product freight prepaid to us during the warranty period Please attach your name address telephone number a description of the problem and proof of date of original purchase This warranty does not apply if the product has been damaged by accident abuse misuse misapplication or if the product has been modified without the written permission of XANTE CORPORATION XANTE CORPORATION IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY INCLUDING LOST PROFITS DOWNTIME GOODWILL DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT A
16. The package should contain the following items Feeder unit Paper Cassette with cover 2 IOT screws fig 7 3 Options 7 1 2 Place the feeder on a level sturdy surface that meets the guidelines in Printer Location in chapter 1 fig 7 1 Fig 7 1 Paper Cassette Feeder 3 Make sure the printer displays a Please Wait or Ready Idle message Then turn off the printer disconnect the power cord from the power supply and disconnect all interface cables 4 Remove all media from the multipurpose feeder and the output tray then close the multipurpose feeder 5 Pul the cassette out until it stops then lift up slightly and remove it from the printer o The printer weighs approximately 58 5 Ibs 26 5 kg without the toner cassettes and media installed Always have two people lift the printer using the recessed grip areas on the right and left sides 6 Lift the printer over the feeder and align the two stubs on the feeder with the holes on the bottom of the printer fig 7 2 Then lower the printer onto the feeder The feeder s stubs should fit easily into the printer s holes Fig 7 2 Align Printer over Feeder Fig 7 3 Secure Printer to Feeder 7 2 Options Insert the screws supplied with the feeder into the holes on the bottom of the printer fig 7 3 Tighten the screws to secure the feeder to the printer Unpack the cassette load it with paper and install the first and second casset
17. XANT and other printer related information When you finish skip to step 3 b Register Printer Fill out and submit the registration form fig 3 165 Then skip to step 3 Fig 3 165 Support Window c Help Browse XANT s Support site for the desired information You can search for information by product links by topics through the search option or by the Frequently Asked Questions option 3 Close your browser when you finish You also can register your printer or access on line support through your XANT Utilities See Register Online earlier in this chapter for details Using the Advanced Graphics Center Feature Access The Advanced Graphics Center is designed specifically for those who do not have a web browser internet access or an Ethernet card on their printer or PC This program works over the parallel interface only and does not support network interfacing em The Advanced Graphics Center also does not give bi directional support This means A that you have to choose which printer and settings you have the program will not automatically detect this 1 Goto your desktop and follow this path Start Programs Windows Explorer C drive XANT Xtagc Mfcagc Double click the Mfcagc application icon the Advanced Graphics Center launches fig 3 166 then the Setup window appears fig 3 167 3 74 PC Setup aur SAMI Priim Paper Trapt Page Sine aieo Leite r T Uppa Optional Trag V Less C
18. b Select the Resolution dpi you wish to use for a specific job c Select the amount of RAM installed on your printer using the VMOption 4 Click the Details tab fig 3 23 and under Timeout make sure the settings are as follows for a local printer These options are not available for a networked printer Not selected 300 Transmission retry 900 5 Click the PostScript tab fig 3 24 PC Setup 3 11 Pearce iaia TE Duong beaches wath goce per abs 7 Anime hiadh d deonicadar and pare Fig 3 24 PostScript Tab a In the PostScript output format box select PostScript optimized for speed if you have a Pentium processor If not select PostScript optimized for portability ADSC b Under PostScript header select Download header with each print job c Under PostScript timeout values make sure the settings are Job timeout 0 Wait timeout 240 6 Click the General tab if you want to print a test page next click Apply and then Print Test Page 7 Click OK The Printer Properties window closes 8 Select File Close The Printers window closes Configuring Printer Options Various printer specific options become available through your software applications after you install the printer s PPD This section covers these options and suggested settings for them 3 12 PC Setup Fast Imaging Adobe PostScript 3 s Fast Imaging feature allows you to select from two methods of image data compression
19. 3 Select the desired capacity setting from the Capacity drop down menu fig 2 124 Then if you want to reformat the RAM disk device continue to step 4 Otherwise skip to step 5 4 Click Change fig 2 124 a reboot message and Reboot button appear in the window Then click Reboot and a message lets you know that your printer is rebooting Ri You must reboot the printer to make the capacity change take effect Ka NOTE 5 Close your browser KY You also can set aside RAM disk space using the printer s front panel Utility RAM m4 Disk menu For details see RAM Disk in chapter 4 NOT Trays and Media Trays and Media options allow you to choose the default input tray and media types Default Input Tray Default Input Tray allows you to set your printer s default input tray 2 58 Macintosh Setup NOTE p AS 1 Goto the printer home page fig 2 125 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 2 125 Printer Home Page Fig 2 126 Default Input Tray Window 2 Select Printer Configuration Trays and Media Default Media Tray fig 2 125 The Media Types window appears fig 2 126 3 Select the desired default tray from the Input Tray drop down menu fig 2 126 Then dick Change 4 Close your browser You also can select a tray using the printer s Tray Select key as well as enable tray chaining from the printer s front panel For details see Tray Selection Options
20. 6 7 Product name 2 61 3 65 Product registration 1 19 Protocol G 8 Protocols EtherTalk 4 15 IPP 4 15 LPR 4 15 TCP IP 4 15 PS Files Folder Description pdf 2 36 PS Files folder 2 36 Factory ps 2 36 Fonts ps 2 36 Fontsamp ps 2 36 Netpgoff ps 2 36 Netpgon ps 2 37 Ramdisk ps 2 37 Startpgoff ps 2 37 Startpgon ps 2 37 PS_Files folder 3 42 PS3Fonts Install 2 28 Q QuarkXPress 2 74 2 75 Balloon Help 2 76 PDF Macintosh 2 75 PDF PC 3 41 Quark folder 2 76 Queue G 8 Quick reference sheet 4 3 R RAM 1 4 6 8 7 4 G 8 Font Accelerator 4 12 Upgrades 7 1 RAM disk 2 56 2 57 G 8 Font Accelerator 4 12 RAM Disk menu 4 20 RAM size 2 61 3 65 Ramdisk ps 2 37 Raster image G 8 Ready idle status message 8 2 Ready printing status message 8 2 Reference sheet 4 3 Register online 2 32 Register printer 2 69 2 70 Registration G 8 Registration form 2 33 Reset 1 status message 8 2 Reset key 4 2 Resetting job status message 8 2 Resident fonts 6 7 Resolution 1 4 6 8 7 4 G 9 Changing 4 3 Engine speed 4 20 7 14 Memory requirements 4 20 PPD option 4 9 Upgrade 7 14 Resolution menu 4 20 Restart printer 2 36 RIP G 9 ROM G 9 Router G 9 S Safety Information iii Ozone iii Printer weight 7 3 Scanned images 8 4 ScenicSoft Preps 2 74 2 75 2 76 Screen lpi 2 22 3 15 Screen menu 4 21 Screen shape 2 22 3 16 Macintosh 2 22 3 16 Screening G 9 Sealing tape 8 7 Security 2 66 3 70 Changing a passw
21. Downend Fatta loinbssd Posl amp criptl Pile a O Quit Fig 2 81 Adobe Downloader Menu For example to change the printer s EtherTalk zone name using Adobe Downloader and the Setzone ps file in the XANTE Utilities 1 Usea text editor such as SimpleText to open the Setzone ps file in the PS Files folder on the XANTE Utilities CD ROM 2 34 Macintosh Setup 2 Change the name of the name of zone in parentheses to the name of your EtherTalk zone 3 Save the file and download it to your printer using Adobe Downloader s File Download PostScript File option fig 2 81 y EtherTalk zone names are limited to 32 characters are not case sensitive and cannot CR 4 include the equal approximately equal asterisk colon or at characters Also you can use the browser to change the printer s EtherTalk zone name see Network EtherTalk General and TCP IP Configuration later in this chapter for details Adobe Downloader File and Special Menus contain options that allow you to download files check printer status and manage fonts File Menu The File menu allows you to download fonts and PostScript files to the printer and quit Adobe Downloader Download Fonts This menu allows you to download fonts to printer memory Fonts downloaded to your printer are considered resident which means applications do not have to bundle these fonts with print jobs Fonts downloaded to printer memory only re
22. IP LPR and Parallel options each of which displays current printer settings for its network protocol 1 Goto the printer home page fig 2 135 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 2 135 Printer Home Page Fig 2 136 I O Settings Window 2 Select Printer Information I O Settings fig 2 135 The I O Settings window appears fig 2 136 3 Select the desired protocol AppSocket EtherTalk IP LPR or Parallel fig 2 136 then check its settings 2 62 Macintosh Setup a The AppSocket Information Page fig 2 137 lists On Type Enabled Interpreter PrinterControl and OutputDevice settings Fig 2 137 AppSocket Information Page Fig 2 138 EtherTalk Information Page b The EtherTalk Information Page fig 2 138 lists On Type Enabled HasNames Interpreter EtherTalkType EtherTalkZone EthernetAddress DelayedOutputClose Printer Controller OutputDevice and Filtering settings C The IP Information Page fig 2 139 lists On Type IPAddress NetworkMask GatewayAddress BroadcastAddress IPAddressDynamic TransmitEncapsulation and Physical settings Fig 2 139 IP Information Page Fig 2 140 IPP Information Page d The IPP Information Page fig 2 140 lists On Type Enabled Interpreter DelayedOutputClose PrinterControl HasNames and OutputDevice settings Macintosh Setup 2 63 e The LPR Information Page fig 2 141 lists On Type Enabled Interpreter D
23. Informational Pages window appears fig 3 94 3 Set start up page low toner page and network page printing as desired fig 3 94 a Start Page Select either On to enable start up page printing or select Off to disable it Then click Change b Low Toner Page Select either On to enable low toner page printing or select Off to disable it Then click Change c Network Page Select either On to enable low toner page printing or select Off to disable it Then click Change 4 Close your browser Ew You also can control start up page printing using the Startpg on and Startpg off files eA in on the XANTE Utilities CD ROM See PS_Files Folder earlier in this chapter for details Network EtherTalk General and TCP IP Configuration The Network option allows you to control EtherTalk and TCP IP configuration PC Setup 3 45 EtherTalk Configuration On an EtherTalk network with more than one zone the network router assigns your printer a default zone Check with your System Administrator to determine the correct zone for your printer then if necessary change the printer s zone name Also if more than one printer of the same model is on the Ethernet network you may want to change the printer name to avoid confusion or just to personalize the printer To configure EtherTalk settings 1 Goto the printer home page fig 3 95 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 3 95 Printer Home
24. Initializing status message 8 2 Input tray 2 58 Install printer 2 12 Install PS3Fonts 2 28 Installation Aldus FreeHand PPD Macintosh 2 75 Aldus PageMaker PPD Macintosh 2 75 Auxiliary utilities 3 32 Macintosh OS X 2 4 QuarkXPress PDF Macintosh 2 75 QuarkXPress PDF PC 3 41 Utilities 3 4 3 21 Installed memory 2 23 3 17 Installed options 2 65 3 68 Installing Paper cassette 1 11 Toner cartridge 1 9 Interface cable G 5 Interface control 4 15 Interfaces 1 4 6 8 Ethernet 1 18 Illustration of 1 18 Parallel 1 18 Internal hard disk 7 7 Internet support 8 22 IP 2 62 3 66 IP address 2 56 4 15 IP information page 2 63 IPP information page 2 63 IPP protocol 4 15 J Jam Recover menu 4 15 Jams 8 12 Clearing 8 14 Fanning 5 10 Labels 5 9 Locating 8 14 Output tray 6 1 Paper exit area 8 18 Paper feeder 8 16 Preventing 8 12 Toner cartridge area 8 17 K Keys 4 2 Duplex key 4 2 Enter key 4 3 Form Feed key 4 2 Menu key 4 3 Online key 4 2 Reset key 4 2 Test key 4 3 Tray Select key 4 2 L Labels 2 60 Jams 5 9 Media weight 2 21 3 14 4 17 Printing 5 9 Printing tips 5 9 Landscape G 5 Language 2 3 Language printer 6 7 Language menu 4 16 LEDs 4 1 Data 4 2 Duplex 4 2 Manual 4 2 Online Ready 4 2 Level 1 reset 4 4 Level 2 reset 4 4 Levels of gray G 5 Line screen G 5 Line screen settings 4 21 Linearization 2 42 2 44 3 48 4 13 G 5 Advanced Graphics Center 3 75 Lost detail 8 4 Low toner page 2 38 2 61 2
25. NOTE Vi You may need to add the printer driver to the Resource Management Service database A instructions should be found in the network documentation Also if the driver is not currently in the list instead of adding that to the resource database you can select None as the driver to select and it should prompt you to supply a disk to load that driver 10 Click Continue The main browser window should appear with the new controlled access printer listed Creating NDPS Printers at the Server Console This procedure will help you configure an NDPS Novell Directory Printing Services agent to service and print to a printer using TCP IP These steps assume you already have an NDPS manager defined l 2 Load NDPS NLM A screen should appear that lists all NDPS Manager objects Select an NDPS manager This then lists the printer Agents currently defined under this manager Press Insert An Edit box appears Enter the name of a new Printer Agent Select the Configuration utilities A Gateway Type window appears Select the Novell Printer Gateway This option is used for local and remote printers Select the appropriate printer from the list The Port Handler Type window appears Select the Novell Port Handler The connection type window appears Select the correct connection type from the following options Local Printer You are attached directly to the server where NDPS MGR is loaded Manual This optio
26. Parallel issiissnsacsssanspiessinsocassapsbionoinsbsacissansnsansaninsausanages 1 18 Reg ired Equipment PANIED cssisisaissdioidesadaisisaisuisustssenidselenesilesnues 1 19 Required Equipment USB 554555 5cs suticusedudbcessdudbauasduansacaavastadiseigietansabiesaaaatanin 1 19 Wartanty and Product Resist att cctsschaccsscbsiucssccinsanncsiausescunssaecdvisansdnisssuscnees 1 19 Chapter 2 Macintosh Setup sscccssrsesudceisesancsbsaccccatsetascsiaceestsbaabessennetusesbades 2 1 introduch on NH M 2 1 Port Connection Ethernet POT seen qn CHAR RUN ORELK KE DUSRHUCDUEK RAM KE OL geil Configuring PACE LANE m 2 1 Configure the Macintosh for Ether Dalles i s i soisscissotocsssindasessindosessdoibcedsarsbes 2 2 Change the Ether Valle Zone NaMe ja ssisissassapivesnsssdssonsesausersecuncoaesussoeccsiens 2 2 Before Beginning Software Installation and Configuration 2 2 IN A M 2 9 Macintosh OS X Printer Tistallaioiti 5siscsssdaiacassdecesessdbindessabinsaertdetonedsdeioosseay 2 4 Configuring Your Printer from an OS X Sys lITL uoce ecteaio ierit tiq iteqenis 2 9 viii Adobe PostScript Printer Driver and Printer PPD Installation OS 9 2 11 Tasta PEE etea e elideDeu e nt N Sette tat Puneet RD Geb ener denen Pre ME 2 12 Install the PostScript Driver AdobePS OS 9 sssscicsedcsssusebsscancedoadapeiebsbstnans 2 14 AdobePS Driver Manual Inst AAO iseiese suse ptriu pepper psit ped ay rg 2 16 XANT
27. Power cycle the printer turn off then back on 5 Using a word processing application open setipsub ps file from the ps files folder Edit the file so it contains the IP Subnet and Gateway addresses you obtained from your network administrator Save the file to your c drive 6 Goto DOS Command Prompt 7 Type the following substituting the appropriate port if necessary COPY SETIPSUB PS LPT1 J 8 Power cycle the printer again and verify that the start up page contains your IP Subnet and Gateway addresses 9 Goto DOS Command Prompt to ping the printer Then type the following substituting the correct IP address for IP ADDRESS for example if your IP address is 192 9 200204 you would type PING 192 9 200204 J at the DOS prompt CAPING IP ADDRESS J ANS If you can ping the printer go on to step 10 If you cannot ping your printer contact b v4 your Network Administrator Q NOTE 10 Go back to your Printer Properties and select the Ports tab fig 3 53 3 26 PC Setup bama Stang ali iie bmi Ducks Baii Sava bee We kakng japi Dea assets m ael Ta i had m aa n Fig 3 53 Printer Properties Window Fig 3 54 Select the Ports Tab 11 Click the Ports tab fig 3 54 The Ports window will appear fig 3 54 12 Select Add Port fig 3 54 The Printer Ports window will appear fig 3 55 Fig 3 55 Printer Ports Window 13 After clicking New Port a Welcome Window appears R
28. Printer MaintenanGe sagas an ssisens taneeananisncisanspanienariansuanansnaiansaanahenadansuananenauanguanl 2 65 Printer Sec rity MMC cC 2 66 Doch LoS out oera a DD URGE PU MINI DUUM RE 2 66 BELDSISVUDEUO aoi Nod Dodd HIM 2 67 Change Reset the PASSwWOFU ores PRRRUGN NEUEN NRURON NE ERO KL RIS EL IH EIL cIO dde 2 68 Ji rrg 0 mc 2 68 XANT Web Access XANT Web Site Register Printer and Help 2 69 Managing FOES Mc 2 70 Reconfiguring the PPD after Adding Options sain ipn RESQUE SEINEN RUNE dA 2 72 Adobe WED DING ACCESS nee ARERR NERE RERE RERE Er Deb ERE Dn ERO Ie 2 73 Eder Applic alo SUP PO otare e EEE E DISAIT UR D E 2 74 Application PPS and PDEs PS tutta bett oth bei bri ordei tT Eriaiota 2 74 App Drivers Fold ekosis itengue ee ee D RROR DR ER OR LIN ERE AEN PNE A 2 75 Pagel sleet SPP UY BORGO acoso rub E UR Nep d 2 75 OwarkX Press PDE POE v5 55 neneeese eea e EEE 2 75 SCEN SONP reps POMEL erisir eE etre cda Er ooo ds be E 2 76 CHAPTER 3 PC SebDoeitausbatesde olxbiedbxbsLapdudumi ulis Dusdvstun un p Fuga ua DURS 3 1 Port COCO IS saec ioute gii aii ieia p holen E E E E AE A 3 1 Parallel Connection senie eeaeee 3 1 EtWerne Connec N Oee E AE EE E E EE 3 1 USB C nnecton Tor PO Only csxsun NE A GIG UR SAU RPAIORGRSLRONSMDURDASIPINN 3 2 Installing Adobe PostScript Printer DEIVOPBasssnspeseospdesduidieppishdeuninbheraitui 3 2 Deleting Previous Driver Versi ns sp xceevaconaeseacansc
29. Printer specific options 2 23 TraySwitch 2 23 Adobe PostScript 2 17 Drivers Macintosh 2 11 Font samples 2 68 3 72 Fonts list 2 68 3 72 Utility files Macintosh 2 36 Utility files PC 3 42 Adobe PostScript 3 1 4 Fast imaging 2 19 3 13 4 12 Fonts 2 28 3 42 Fonts PC 3 42 Smooth shading 2 22 3 16 4 20 Adobe PS3Fonts 2 23 Adobe Type Manager 2 17 2 23 2 26 3 34 Adobe web site 2 73 AdobePS 3 4 Installation 2 12 3 4 3 21 System requirements 2 16 AdobePS driver 2 11 2 15 2 16 Installation 2 14 2 15 Manual installation 2 16 Advanced gamma control Advanced Graphics Center 3 79 Advanced Graphics Center 3 37 Advanced gamma control 3 79 Feature access 3 74 Linearization 3 75 More X ACT 3 80 Air vent 6 1 Aldus drivers 2 75 FreeHand 2 75 PageMaker 2 75 App Drivers folder 2 75 AppleTalk 2 2 G 1 Application software G 1 Applications Older 2 74 Support 2 74 AppSocket 2 62 3 66 ATM 2 23 3 34 Install 2 26 Remove 2 28 Auxiliary utilities 3 32 B Balloon Help 2 76 Banding G 1 Horizontal 8 9 Bitmapped image G 1 Black dots 8 5 Black page 8 7 Black streaks 8 6 Blank areas 8 8 Index l 1 Blank page 8 7 Blanket G 1 Bleed G 1 Blurred print 8 9 Bold print shaded 8 9 Browser Printer configuration 2 38 3 44 Printer home page 2 37 3 43 Printer information 2 60 3 64 Printer maintenance 2 65 3 69 Printer registration 3 73 Printer Security 2 66 3 70 AccelaFont 2 42 Adobe web site 2 73 Default in
30. Select the folder on your Macintosh that contains the font files from the drop down menu on the top left of the window fig 2 158 The large box on the left displays the fonts in the selected folder 3 Select Memory or Disk from the Device menu as the destination for the downloaded fonts fig 2 158 If more than one optional hard disk is attached to your printer select the target disk from the drop down menu 4 Highlight a single font in the list on the left and click Add or click Add All to select all of the fonts in the open folder The selected font s will appear in the list on the right of the screen fig 2 158 To remove fonts from the selected list on the right of the screen highlight the fonts and click Remove 5 Click Download to send the selected fonts to the printer 6 Wait until download is complete then select File Quit to close the Adobe Downloader Macintosh Setup 2 71 To review and remove downloaded fonts 1 Open the Adobe Downloader and select Special Printer Font Directory The following window appears fig 2 159 Tomi Hirerbary pm fer SANTE Printer Where would you like the directory sent Screen O Printer female memory 7HP keyless OK Cancel_ Ce aene Cg Fig 2 159 Directory Location Window Fig 2 160 Font Directory Window 2 Choose Printer or Screen fig 2 159 and then click OK If you select Printer a list of the printer s resident fonts prints
31. avtamatir ally mei ab siberrenaing rr PRE spon E CHOS CHEI De be stie F Toriuimpsaced mika briialisr heer been ee ie fae dictu urea chai did er eerste lay onthe vier eiie a Cae Cx Fig 2 68 Quit Applications Window Fig 2 69 Replaced Fonts Window 7 Click Continue fig 2 68 A progress window lets you know the installation s progress 8 Waituntil installation is complete when the Replaced Fonts window appears fig 2 69 click OK An Installation Was Successful window appears fig 2 64 1 Bn kmin sus wur surcursbu 522 brem inrialnd taeae Seer eggs yas rini prar ced nr P paci inst Hei re Qu Du bre Gee eras ee FT pini mis Dn peH Tn ir in Rn di spanadkat ori viz i Certi Gee et Cees Fig 2 70 Installation Was Successful Window 9 Click Restart if you are finished click Quit to leave the Installer or click Continue if you wish to perform additional installations fig 2 70 View Manuals You can open and view the printer s documentation from the XANTE Utilities via the View Manuals drop down menu or the Docs menu AY Acrobat Reader needs to be installed to view the manual my NOTE 2 30 Macintosh Setup 1l Insert the XANT Utilities CD ROM into your Macintosh The Main Installation window should open automatically fig 2 71 If not double click the CD ROM icon then double click the Setup icon l Vie aman DE Pet idioms Bime Viena Fig 2 71 Main
32. fig 3 152 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 3 152 Printer Home Page Fig 3 153 Installed Options Window 2 Select Printer Information Installed Options fig 3 152 The Installed Options window appears fig 3 153 3 Check the right side of the window fig 3 153 to determine the installation status of the printer s options Options not applicable to your printer may still appear in the options list their status will be listed as Not Installed 4 Close your browser Printer Maintenance The Printer Maintenance Clean Printer option allows you to access your printer s cleaning feature 1 Go to the printer home page fig 3 2154 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 3 154 Printer Home Page Fig 3 155 Clean Printer Window 2 Select Printer Maintenance Clean Printer fig 3 154 The Clean Printer window appears fig 3 155 PC Setup 3 69 3 Click Clean Printer fig 3 155 to run the clean printer feature which cleans the printer s fuser roller 4 Close your browser Printer Security This feature is designed to prevent unwanted changes to the printer configuration Some of the printer features that are configurable from the printer s web page can be locked by setting a password to that printer When a password is set the user has to log in to access these features Login and Logout When printer security password protection i
33. if you select Screen the Font Directory window appears fig 2 160 Y To print a list of resident fonts in ROM use Adobe Downloader s File Download PostScript File option to download the Fonts ps file or download the Fontsamp ps file to see a sample of these fonts NOTE i3 3 Select the font storage area i e Memory from the Device menu fig 2 160 to view the fonts present in that area 4 Remove a font from printer memory by highlighting the font and clicking Delete 5 Click OK to close the Font Directory window fig 2 160 and return to the Adobe Downloader main menu RY To remove fonts downloaded to printer memory turn the printer off Fonts are stored B in printer memory only during the current power cycle NOTE Reconfiguring the PPD after Adding Options If you change options after initial printer setup such as installing an optional feeder and tray or a memory upgrade you need to reconfigure the PPD to reflect the change s Use the following procedure to update the PPD configuration The optional 2400 dpi upgrade is used as an example for this procedure 2 72 Macintosh Setup 1l Select Chooser from the Apple menu The Chooser Window appears fig 2 161 dumm m oo OOOO Fig 2 161 Chooser Window Fig 2 162 Installable Options Window 2 Select AdobePS in the left side of the window then select your printer in the right side and click Setup fig 2 162 A PPD Configurati
34. ii i de Se GE CERTI RE Lugena E Beh Cede RHE DH eee CHER ES Fig 2 51 Caution Window Fig 2 52 Installing Progress Window 6 Wait until Acrobat Reader finishes installing An Installation Was Successful window appears fig 2 53 eres Fig 2 53 Installation Was Successful Window 7 Click Quit fig 2 53 When the Main Installation window reappears close it Fig 2 47 8 Go to the Application Mac OS 9 Acrobat Reader 5 0 folder Then open and read the ReadMe html file 9 Close the ReadMe html file next close the Acrobat Reader 5 0 and Application Mac OS 9 folders and then remove the utilities CD ROM from your Macintosh Macintosh Setup 2 25 Install ATM Adobe Type Manager You can install the Adobe Type Manager application from the XANTE Utilities via the Utilities menu or via the Install ATM link 1l Insert the XANTE Utilities CD ROM into your Macintosh The Main Installation window should open automatically fig 2 54 If not double click the CD ROM icon then double click the Setup icon tes Mee E Wit baai RI Fig 2 54 Main Installation Window Fig 2 55 Utilities Menu 2 Select Adobe Type Manager ATM from the Software Utilities drop down menu fig 2 54 or select Adobe Type Manager ATM from the Utilities menu fig 2 55 A window appears asking you to indicate the appropriate country to view the ATM license for that area fig 2 56 Infica e the ceanby where yau are insta
35. in chapter 4 Media Types Media Types options allow you to configure the media type for each of your printer s input sources 1 Goto the printer home page fig 2 127 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 2 127 Printer Home Page Fig 2 128 Configure Media Types Window Macintosh Setup 2 59 2 Select Printer Configuration Trays and Media Media Types fig 2 127 The Media Types window appears fig 2 128 3 Select the desired media type for the input source fig 2 128 Options are Paper the factory default Transparency Cover Stock Label Stock Matte Film Clear Film Heavy Paper and UserDef User Defined 1 through 5 Then click Change 4 Close your browser Qc You also can configure the media type through your printer s front panel See Media fA Types in chapter 4 for details Printer Information Printer Information options allow you to access printer diagnostic general I O setting and option information 1 Goto the printer home page fig 2 129 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 2 129 Printer Home Page Fig 2 130 Printer Information Options 2 Select Printer Configuration Printer Information fig 2 129 Printer Information Options appear fig 2 130 The Printer Information options include Diagnostic Information General Information I O Settings and Installed Options Diagnostic Information The Diagnostic Information
36. printer PPD Menus PPD settings override printer default settings The AdobePS printer driver and your printer s PPD must be installed and configured properly for PPD options to appear in your application s Print dialog box See Adobe PostScript Printer Driver and Printer PPD Installation OS 9 in chapter 2 Macintosh or Installing AdobePS Printer Driver and Printer PPD in chapter 3 PC for details On a Macintosh use the Chooser s Auto Setup feature to set installable options to agree with the printer s configuration To change PPD menu defaults use the Print dialog box Save Settings button See Selecting PPD Options Macintosh earlier in this chapter On a PC PPD menu defaults and the installable options are set during PPD configuration See Configuring Printer Options and Reconfiguring the PPD after Adding Options in chapter 3 4 Configuration The following chart lists features that can be configured from the Print dialog box Accurate Screens Negative Print Enhanced Screens Resolution Fast Imaging Smooth Shading Gamma Tray Switch Mirror Print PC Menu only R Some applications require additional configuration to access certain features See your L4 d application documentation NOTE Configuring Printer Features Printer interface and features are set using front panel keys and menus PPD options in your application Print dialog box and XANTE utilities via your browser
37. 10 82 215 mm x 279 mm 212 mm x 275 mm Legal 8 50 x 14 00 8 30 x 13 89 215 mm x 355 mm 211 mm x 353 mm AA 8 26 x 11 69 8 14 x 11 49 210 mm x 297 mm 207 mm x 292 mm A3 11 69 x 16 53 11 49 x 16 45 297 mm x 420 mm 292 mm x 418 mm B5 7 16 x 10 11 7 04 x 9 96 182 mm x 257 mm 179 mm x 253 mm B4 10 11 x 14 33 9 96 x 14 13 257 mm x 364 mm 253 mm x 359 mm Ledger 11 00 x 17 00 10 82 x 16 85 11 x 17 279 mm x 431 mm 275 mm x 428 mm Executive 7 25 x 10 50 7 16 x 10 35 185 mm x 266 mm 182 mm x 263 mm Universal 13 00 x 18 50 12 69 x 18 42 13 x 18 5 330 mm x 469 mm 322 mm x 468 mm 13 x 35 5 13 00 x 35 50 12 69 x 35 23 330 mm x 901 mm 322 mm x 895 mm 5 2 Media Selecting Handling and Printing Com 10 4 13 x 9 50 3 93 x 9 33 105 mm x 241 mm 100 mm x 237 mm Monarch 3 88 x 7 50 3 74 x 7 36 99 mm x 190 mm 95 mm x 187 mm DL 4 33 x 8 66 4 13 x 8 50 110 mm x 220 mm 105 mm x 216 mm C5 6 37 x 9 01 6 22 x 8 89 162 mm x 229 mm 158 mm x 226 mm Set page margins in your applications to fit within the imageable areas If you try to print outside the imageable area many applications issue a warning message giving you an opportunity to make changes some applications however clip the image and print the page Printing on Custom Sized Media Always use the appropriate feed source for the size and type media you are using following the appr
38. 2 Select Printer Configuration Informational Pages fig 2 85 The Informational Pages window appears fig 2 86 3 Set startup page low toner page and network page printing as desired fig 2 86 a Start Page Select either On to enable startup page printing or select Off to disable it Then click Change b Low Toner Page Select either On to enable low toner page printing or select Off to disable it Then click Change c Network Page Select either On to enable low toner page printing or select Off to disable it Then click Change 4 Close your browser LW You also can control startup page printing using the Startpgon ps and Startpgoff ps A files See PS Files Folder earlier in this chapter for details Network EtherTalk General and TCP IP Configuration Network options allow you to control EtherTalk General and TCP IP configurations EtherTalk Configuration On an EtherTalk network with more than one zone the network router assigns your printer a default zone Check with your System Administrator to determine the correct zone for your printer then if necessary change the printer s zone name Also if more than one printer of the same model is on the Ethernet network you may want to change the printer name to avoid confusion or just to personalize the printer Macintosh Setup 2 39 To configure EtherTalk settings 1 Goto the printer home page fig 2 87 See Printer Home Page earlier in this
39. 3 72 Low Toner 4 25 Low toner page 2 68 3 72 Menu Layout page 4 26 Menu layout page 2 69 aad acd l 16 Index Network page 2 68 Start page 4 25 Startup page 2 68 3 72 Verify 4 26 UTP Cable G 10 Port 2 1 V Vector image G 10 Vellum G 10 Verification page 4 26 Vertical black streaks 8 6 Vertical blanks 8 8 View manuals 2 30 3 39 Virtual memory 2 52 4 25 VM 3 48 3 57 WwW Waiting status message 8 3 Warming up Status message 8 3 Warnings 1 3 Cleaners 6 6 Combustible toner 1 9 Compressed air 6 4 6 5 Cooling time 8 18 Fire hazard 8 14 Fuser 6 3 Fuser temperature 8 18 Hot fuser 8 18 Hot temperatures 8 17 Ozone iii Paper scraps 8 14 Power cord 1 16 Power outlet 1 15 Printer damage 6 4 Printer weight 1 6 6 1 6 2 7 2 7 3 Protective glasses 6 4 6 5 Screws in printer 7 7 Toner 1 9 Warning label 8 17 Wires 6 5 Warranty 1 19 6 9 6 10 Effects of consumables 6 11 Web menu 2 32 2 33 2 74 Web site 2 69 Weight Printer 6 2 6 7 Win95 98 Me LPR tool 3 17 Windows 95 Selecting PPD options 4 5 Windows 98 Selecting PPD options 4 5 Windows 98 Me 3 4 Acrobat Reader 3 32 LPR tool 3 17 Parallel connection 3 7 Printer PPD 3 10 Windows NT Selecting PPD options 4 7 Windows NT 2000 NT 3 21 Installing utilities 3 21 X X ACT 1 5 4 9 G 11 Front panel 4 9 X Height G 11 X Screening G 11 XANT Customer service 8 21 Fax support 8 21 Online support 2 33 Phone support 8 21 Utilities CD R
40. 5 go to step 4 for OS X version 10 2 1 skip to step 5 4 Do the following if you are using OS X version 10 1 5 R Some features may appear in the Print window that do not apply to your printer For gt v4 example you may see 2400 x 2400 DPI resolution even when your printer does not have this option installed In such cases disregard these listings NOTE a Click Add in the window asking if you would like to add to your list of printers now fig 2 6 or if you already have printers installed click Add Printer The Printer List window appears fig 2 7 2 4 Macintosh Setup 18 LIII LHI sa Appin Talk irrar kil ioe Pesisi Lud NM LL ie S s id bj merma ma pe Ls anny fma wns m primm weed 1 TL AIR paat t MAA GAL URI UE PD URS B nna anm emat E t Cien EIN drm Pusnr adii Tae RAHTE Prat PPO tan fat Bats isi ia ELA LLLA er ra Fig 2 6 Add Printer Window Fig 2 7 Printer List Window b Select AppleTalk from the top drop down menu fig 2 7 select AppleTalk Network in the second drop down menu highlight your printer in the Name list select your printer PPD from the Printer Model drop down menu then click Add The Printer List window reappears fig 2 8 with your printer listed The install location for your printer s PPD is Hard Drive Library Printers PPDS Contents Resources EN LPROJ Folder Fig 2 8 Printer List Window The black dot indicates the default pr
41. 7 14 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting eee t Et REX E EIER EPA EE E EX EV EI REUAE 8 1 MOUE HON Qian NN P ET 8 1 Stat s Messages SNNT 8 1 Power anid Setup ISSUES aissis dd oeiee eeaeee e eaea eea aE asa NN 8 3 xiv Print MOM ISSUES ques natale piu th A UR d ERI 8 5 Film and Pili Star d Specific ISSUES eee oir netiis ab d 8 10 Mecnanical Issues ooo tases 8 11 RUEDA MU E 8 12 Preventing Ja S t 8 12 MAINS 3 HUE oosee paper enun Deb Densplr ence borxpefi Denn i menu 8 13 Locating aine oo pte ete GG 8 14 Me Media JanS ap cers sepa E ene IND Mp UVP deii MUN 8 14 Clearing a Paper Cassette or Multipurpose Feeder Jam 8 14 Clearing a Back of Paper Feeder 3Efbusassendsesdeidv e ask rni rechts 8 16 Clearing Toner Cartridge Area Jam aad petes eerte sb e dea aaepe pedes 8 17 Clearing a Paper Piatt Atea DRE uessensendedehesnecsdotuteai pin brdr tbt pe bri aBedaihie odis 8 18 Reassem bline the Printeren 8 20 Calling or Technical SUPPO rang E EEEE EENES 8 21 Troubleshooting Information s s sssssesesesesssessseesrsesesesesrsssssressssrssssessseseseseseses 8 21 Fa CST d N A E A E AE P G 1 ET O EA I I 1 000 XV xvi Chapter 1 Introduction and Installation FilmMaker 4 Fig 1 1 FilmMaker 4 Printer The FilmMaker 4 Fig 1 1 provides a solid prepress solution for graphics professionals Standard density and advanced graphics features all
42. Bookman Century Schoolbook or they may describe the typeface s appearance Clearface BrushScript See also Typeface FIFO First In First Out FIFO chips are used as hardware buffers to serialize transmission of data to the print engine File Server A computer specifically intended for storing files that people can share over the network FilmStar 4 XANTP s desktop system that processes high quality positive or negative film without the time and expense of camera and darkroom procedures Font In desktop publishing often font is used interchangeably with the term typeface However a font is a typeface subset in a particular point size and style See also Typeface Glossary G 3 Font Accelerator XANTE technology which sets aside a percentage of available RAM disk to store fonts When enabled Font Accelerator automatically loads the most recently used fonts into RAM disk for faster access by the printer See also RAM disk Gamma Curve A graphical representation of the relationship between input and output values of a device such as a monitor or printer If the device reproduces outputs the exact values requested input the graph is a straight line Gamma Correction The process of changing a device s gamma curve by adjusting midrange grayscale values without altering black shadow and white highlight values at each end of a gray scale XANTE supplies seven gamma curves with your printer and XANTE utilities all
43. FilmMaker 4 PPD Manual Installation eene 2 17 Connew me dd uo c c 2 18 Configuring Printer Options buste mdboaRte ied pein Mab oN I MOD oV M MDNoN M DUM oV PN DRM oM E DEUM DUS 2 19 Printer SPEC CONG E 2 19 Fast Id HE 1 as deua dat dad dad E 2 19 Cita at a a le C 2 20 Media Weie Mii mientra otet a a ANAR 2 21 lloc ETIN Fesses eee deogan a eE a e e e Ee E E E i eE 2 21 Optimize COULDUE POr cte dauid nipote bia siae eT 2 22 Screen EPI suos eresoeeteiesefesetesegesesescSes esenegeset ed ges es ea vbogeuet eueTes es eve Tees eet 2 22 Screen Shape Dot Shapes aas denda RR ED RN RAS ERAI b RUM udin 2 22 SHOE SHA LUNE eessen ieee indere qe REND FeEORD Eo DURO pERURRO ESI E 2 22 Additional Printer Specific Options for Adobe PageMaker 2 23 Iray witch Iray Chaining Jostein nae e RA ode telo EEEE 2 23 Disc ed M Oea dad OR 2 23 Optional Iraye ee EEE EERE EEE EE E 2 23 Jnstalling Auxiliary ULES PM 2 23 Install Adobe Acrobat Reader iin sccsteccsadocsastesnscsinetsdedstecadetizetabetsgetrbectbotidadibeness 2 23 Install ATM Adobe Type Manager s sssssssesesesessssssssesesesrssrersserssesesensseseseseses 2 26 Tast ANN PSS FONTS tresteg ceee esetei eE EEEE EEE EAE E SAE EEEE EEEE 2 28 View IL UMS PT a a ed dieticians 2 30 PRS SEE B I SNNT ETT 2 32 Access XANT Online Support ana diced Re ho MS TRU ELNLEBIU Eee Matan 2 33 Iascellanpong Procedures
44. FreeHand versions 3 0 and 3 1 To install these PPDs 1 Load and configure the Adobe PostScript printer driver and your printer s PPD following instructions in Install Printer earlier in this chapter 2 Copy your printer s PPD from the CD ROM s OS8 9 App Drivers PageMaker 5 PPD folder to the System Aldus PPD folder on your Macintosh 3 Check your application documentation for details on selecting and using the PPD QuarkXPress PDF Folder NOTE The QuarkXPress PDF folder contains the PDF Printer Description File for your XANTE printer QuarkXPress versions 3 3 X and earlier require this file in addition to the PPD to ensure the highest quality output from your printer and QuarkXPress Install Printer loads the QuarkXPress PDF automatically To load these PDFs manually 1 Load and configure the Adobe PostScript printer driver and your printer s PPD following instructions in Install Printer earlier in this chapter 2 Copy your printer s PDF from the CD ROM s XanteInstallers App Drivers QuarkXPress PDF folder to the appropriate folder on your Macintosh For versions 3 3 X and earlier copy the printer s PDF to the QuarkXPress application PDF folder QuarkXPress 4 X uses your printer s PPD file it does not need a PDF To load a PPD file manually copy your printer s PPD from the CD ROM s Printer Descriptions folder to the System Folder Extensions Printer Descriptions folder on your Macintosh Macintosh Setup
45. Fuser Cover Fig 8 18 Open Fuser Drum Cover 2 Open the fuser drum cover using the colored tabs on each side of the cover fig 8 18 3 Remove any jammed media from the fuser area fig 8 19 Fig 8 19 Remove Media Jam from Fuser Fig 8 20 Close Fuser Drum Cover 4 Close the fuser drum cover using the colored tabs on each side of the cover fig 8 20 Then close the fuser cover fig 8 21 Fig 8 21 Close Fuser Cover Troubleshooting 8 19 Reassembling the Printer 1 Insert the toner cartridge s pins into the printer s guide channels Slide the cartridge into the printer until it stops making sure it is seated properly fig 8 22 See Toner Cartridge in chapter 1 Fig 8 22 Reinstall Toner Cartridge Fig 8 23 Reinstall Paper Cassette s 2 Reload the paper cassette s if necessary and reinsert into the paper feeder s fig 8 23 See Standard Cassette in chapter 1 3 Close and latch the top cover fig 8 24 Fig 8 24 Close Top Cover 4 Reload the multipurpose feeder if necessary Close the multipurpose feeder cover if the media fits completely inside the tray See Multipurpose Feeder in chapter 1 WY If the printer was turned off to clear media jam turn on the printer before loading the S multipurpose feeder NOTE 5 Verify that READY IDLE appears in the front panel window 6 20 Troubleshooting R If the media jam was only in the multi
46. Ghosting Network Computer devices Macintoshes PCs printers etc linked together by cables and able to communicate with each other using one of many network operating standards such as Ethernet Off Line The printer is not accepting data from the host computer The On Line key LED is not lit Offset Lithography indirect printing method in which the inked image of the press plate first prints onto a rubber blanket that then offsets onto the sheet of paper On Line The printer is ready to accept or is accepting data from the host computer The On Line key LED is lit The printer has to be on line to accept and print a job Out of Register When two sheet passes are misaligned G 6 Glossary Output Computer generated information in its final form For example printer output is a printed copy of the information Monitor output is the projected image of the data on screen Parallel Interface technique which transmits several bits of data at the same time through different wires Parallel transmission generally is faster than serial transmission Parameter A value to be used for a job or by a system For example page orientation is a job parameter that can be set to portrait or landscape flow control and parity are system parameters PDF File Portable Document Format or Printer Description File The Portable Document Format file is one that has been converted into a format which can be read by any system without requiri
47. Installation Window Fig 2 72 Docs Menu 2 Select View Manuals in the Main Installation window fig 2 71 or select the desired manual from the Docs menu fig 2 72 The Manuals List Window appears fig 2 73 Fig 2 73 Manuals List Window 3 Highlight the manual file for your printer fig 2 73 then click Choose Acrobat Reader opens and in turn opens the selected manual file y If you previously have not loaded Acrobat Reader on your system a License window m sA appears In this case read the license window and click Accept to finish opening that application Macintosh Setup 2 31 4 View the selected printer manual either the User s Guide fig 2 74 or the Quick Reference Manual fig 2 75 re i Oum ms ren E amp DHSS ek Hirm d t R DP E re he Fig 2 74 User s Guide Fig 2 75 Quick Reference Manual 5 Close the manual file when you are finished then close Acrobat Reader Register Online You can register the printer online from the XANT Utilities via the Web menu or via the utilities Main Information window through either the Register Online option or the Register Your Printer option under Web Information These options open the XANT web site product registration page These features only work if you are connected to a network and online 1l Insert the XANT Utilities CD ROM into your Macintosh The main Installation window should open automatically fig 2 76 If not double cli
48. Installation Window Fig 2 80 Web Menu Macintosh Setup 2 33 2 Select Xante Online Support from the Web Information drop down menu fig 2 79 or select it from the Web menu fig 2 80 Your web browser launches and takes you to the XANT Support web site 3 Close your web browser when you are finished When the Main Installation window appears fig 2 79 close it Miscellaneous Procedures This section covers miscellaneous procedures to make working in the Macintosh environment easier CD ROM PostScript Files and Programs Feature Access You can access and control many printer features via programs and PostScript files on the XANT Utilities CD ROM For example you can use PostScript files to set your printer s EtherTalk zone name control startup page printing or initialize an internal hard disk In a Macintosh environment you can use Adobe Downloader program to download PostScript files and fonts to your printer see the next section Using Adobe Downloader and see PS Files Folder later in this chapter for details Using Adobe Downloader You can download Adobe Downloader fig 2 81 from Adobe s web site see Adobe Web Site Access later in this chapter Use this program to download and manage font files in your printer hard disk and to send PostScript files to your printer Printer amp tabus Primber Feat Direchory Cheer ton Larhe Resfard Prinler E Use Different Password
49. Macintosh 2 75 QuarkXPress PC 3 41 PDFs folder 3 41 Phone numbers Consumables 5 8 6 11 Fax 8 21 Technical support 2 8 2 10 8 21 Pica G 7 Plates 5 3 Plugging 4 19 8 11 Point size G 7 Port G 7 Port connection Ethernet 2 1 Portrait G 7 Ports Connection PC 3 1 Ethernet 1 18 2 1 Illustration of 1 18 Parallel 1 18 USB 4 15 UTP 2 1 PostScript G 7 Resident fonts 6 7 PostScript features 2 42 AccelaFont 2 42 3 48 Linearization 2 42 3 50 LPI 2 42 3 52 Margins 2 42 3 53 More X ACT 2 42 3 55 Reset factory defaults 3 60 Storage devices 3 61 PostScript files Accelafont ps 2 36 D PS 2 36 DHCPOFF ps 2 36 DHCPON ps 2 36 Factory ps 2 36 Feature access 3 41 Fonts ps 2 36 Fontsamp ps 2 36 Initdisk ps 2 36 Netduplex ps 2 36 Netpgoff ps 2 36 Netpgon ps 2 37 Parmdump ps 2 37 Prnipsub ps 2 37 PS Files folder 2 36 Ramdisk ps 2 37 Setip ps 2 37 Setname ps 2 37 Setzone ps 2 37 Startpg ps 2 37 Startpgoff ps 2 37 Startpgon ps 2 37 Syspram ps 2 37 PostScript margins 2 56 PostScript version 2 61 3 65 Power 8 3 Consumption 6 7 Cord 1 7 Supply 6 7 Switch 1 15 1 16 1 17 Troubleshooting 8 3 Power Save menu 4 19 PPD 4 4 G 7 Aldus FreeHand Macintosh 2 75 Aldus PageMaker Macintosh 2 75 Installing 2 12 2 74 Macintosh 2 18 Manual installation 2 17 PageMaker Macintosh 2 75 Reconfiguring 2 72 Reconfiguring PC 3 28 Selecting features Macintosh 4 5 Selecting features Windows 95 4 5 Selecting features Windows 98 4 5 Se
50. Macintosh applications allow you to configure the printer s tray chaining feature using the If the Cassette is out of paper option in the Print dialog box Error Handling menu The Use printer s default option uses the printer s front panel Tray Switch menu setting The Switch to another cassette with the same paper size option implements tray chaining to all cassettes and the multipurpose feeder Virtual Memory VM The VM manu Utility VM allows you to adjust the size of your PostScript virtual memory in Megabytes This setting controls the printer s default virtual memory setting at power up The minimum value allowed is 9 MB 12 MB is the factory default and the maximum value is 40 of installed RAM You also can set the virtual memory via the browser See PostScript Features AccelaFont DPI Linearization LPI Margins More X ACT and VM in chapter 2 Macintosh or chapter 3 PC for details Utility Pages The Utility Print configuration menu includes options to print various utility pages needed for different printer functions Options include Calibration Font List Font Sample Low Toner Start Page Verify Menu Layout and Engine Testpage Calibration Prints a sample Calibration Page which show the printer s current performance as a basis for calibration during linearization Font List Prints a page listing the Adobe PostScript 3 fonts resident on your printer Font Sample Prints a page with s
51. PPDs then it launches the Adobe PostScript Printer Driver installer XANT Utilities CD ROM Documentation is in Adobe Acrobat Portable Documentation Format PDF Use Adobe Acrobat Reader included on the utilities CD ROM to read this documentation See Adobe Acrobat Reader later in this chapter for details Wi XANTE Utilities Installer runs properly only on an Intel based computer system running Windows 98 or Me To load the Adobe PostScript printer drivers manually see the CD ROM s Readme pdf file and Installing Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers earlier in this chapter To load QuarkXPress PDFs manually see PDFs Folder later in this chapter A E To Install Utilities and Drivers 1l Insert the XANTE Utilities CD ROM into your PC XANT Utilities Installer should launch automatically If not select Start Run XInstall xt prinst exe The XANT Utilities Main window appears fig 3 5 3 4 PC Setup a p IETTE m a d cd ENSTALL B um prem ui TALS Fig 3 5 XANTE Utilities Main Window Fig 3 6 Installation Preferences Window 2 Click Install Printer fig 3 4 The Installation Preferences window appears fig 3 6 3 Make the following selections in the Installation Preferences window fig 3 6 a Select your printer from the Select Product drop down menu b Select the appropriate program s for which you want to download the drivers from the Applicat
52. Page Fig 3 96 EtherTalk Configuration Window 2 Select Printer Configuration Network EtherTalk fig 3 95 The EtherTalk Configuration window appears fig 3 96 3 Enter the desired name for the printer fig 3 96 for example you might name the printer Samson Then click Change to the right 4 Enter the new name for the EtherTalk Zone Name fig 3 96 Then click Change to the right Y EtherTalk zone names are limited to 32 characters are not case sensitive and cannot oy include the equal approximately equal asterisk colon or at characters 5 Close your browser General Network Configuration The General configuration option allows you to set the network buffers l Go to the printer home page fig 3 97 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details 3 46 PC Setup Fig 3 97 Printer Home Page Fig 3 98 General Network Configuration Window 2 Select Printer Configuration Network General fig 3 97 The General Network Configuration window appears fig 3 98 3 Select the desired size for network buffers then click Change 4 Close your browser then restart your printer to make the new size setting take effect TCP IP Configuration TCP IP configuration includes the class IP address subnet mask and DHCP options RU Your printer s default TCP IP address should be changed to agree with your network s T 4 TCP IP addresses Check with your System Supervi
53. Read Me window fig 2 28 then click Continue The printer s Install window appears fig 2 29 2 12 Macintosh Setup Fig 2 29 Custom Install Window Fig 2 30 Easy Install Window 5 Select the type of installation from the top left drop down menu fig 2 29 a Select Custom Install if you are installing one or more but not all of the listed printers Then select the appropriate printer s and software b Select Easy Install if you are installing all listed printers and have all listed software on your system 6 Change the installation destination for the files in the Install Location box if necessary y You can quit installation by clicking Quit fig 2 29 Also if you previously ran the EM XANT Utilities Install program and want to remove the files use the Uninstall option to remove them 7 Click Install fig 2 29 Then if you selected any of the listed software for PageMaker QuarkXPress or ScenicSoft Preps in step 5 continue to step 8 Otherwise skip to step 9 8 Read the Application Location window instructions fig 2 31 and click OK Then follow those instructions to locate and select the appropriate application folder s bea wii eom iom an bed vo Enron the QnariPranis rari demisii ior wes aor ro hai Aye arm mind reri bidar nasse tee appropriate eb aad menn Ahad be Deore ibr krilasbrr N pe mest i pee Teini dahi wid ee a ed ik ilii Comes C2 CJ Fig 2 81 Application Location Wind
54. See Fuser Temperature earlier in this chapter for more details The factory default for Paper and Transparency is Cool Warm is the factory default for Heavy Paper Cover and Labels 4 16 Configuration Media Weight Media Weight allows you to designate the type of media used and to access correct temperatures for that media Set Media Weight from your application Print dialog box Options are Paper Heavy Paper Cover Transparency Matte Film Clear Film and Labels media weights Vi You can create custom gamma curves to calibrate or adjust your printer for specific mY media weights For details see Halftone Calibration Technology Gamma earlier in this chapter and see the linearization section of PostScript Features AccelaFont DPI Linearization LPI Margins More X ACT and VM in chapter 2 Macintosh or 3 PC NOTE Mirror Print Mirror Print allows you to produce a mirror image which is reversed left to right fig 4 9 This type of image is used to produce right reading documents required for imaging silk screens or metal plates Set Mirror Print from your application Print dialog box To ensure the highest quality when producing mirror images use this menu in the Print dialog box rather than an application setting True enables this feature and False the factory default disables it 4 COVAHVA TVTTAOd Y OJOVHJAT O IOAMI eononisH qeri asso 7 11A soil bas L s2ived n
55. United States Patent and Trademark Office and some foreign countries ITC typefaces are copyrighted by the International Typeface Corporation Helvetica New Century Schoolbook and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype AG and or its subsidiaries FreeHand is a trademark of Macromedia Inc Microsoft Windows Windows NT and OpenType are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Installer VISE is a registered trademark of MindVision Inc Netscape Navigator is a registered trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation in the United States and other countries Novell NDPS and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell Inc PowerQuest is a registered trademark of PowerQuest QuarkXPress and Quark are registered trademarks of Quark Inc Preps is a registered trademark and ScenicSoft is a trademark of ScenicSoft Inc Solaris is a trademark of Sun Micro Systems Inc UL is a registered trademark of Underwriters Laboratory UNIX is a registered trademark of UNIX Systems Laboratories Inc ENERGY STAR is a registered trademark of the US EPA Ethernet and Xerox are registered trademarks of Xerox Corporation All other brand and product names are trademarks registered trademarks or service marks of their respective holders Manual Notice XANTE CORPORATION reserves the right to make changes to this manual and to the equipment described herein without notice Every effort h
56. XANT PostScript 3 printer Font Sample Page prints samples of Adobe PostScript 3 fonts resident on your XANT PostScript 3 printer Menu Layout prints a page listing the front panel menus and their current settings 3 72 PC Setup 1 Goto the printer home page fig 3 162 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 3 162 Printer Home Page Fig 3 163 Utilities Pages Window 2 Select Utility Pages fig 3 162 The Utilities Pages window appears fig 3 163 3 Select Print to the right of the utility page you wish to print Start Page Low Toner Page Network Page Font List Page Font Sample Page Menu Layout or Engine Testpage Depending on the selected page printing takes approximately 6 to 30 seconds 4 Close your browser XANTE Web Access XANTE Web Site Register Printer and Help When you are online you can access XANTE s web site register your printer or obtain technical help 1 Go to the printer home page fig 3 164 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 3 164 Printer Home Page 2 Select the desired web access http www xante com XANT s web site Register Printer or Help fig 3 164 When the selected site s window appears take the following appropriate action PC Setup 3 73 a http www xante com Browse the website for desired information This site offers fast access to product support contact trade show career
57. and film is 10 the default setting for plate is 0 Then click Change 5 Close your browser Fuser Temperature The Fuser Temperature option allows you to adjust the printer s fuser temperature for the type of media used 1 Go to the printer home page fig 3 120 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 3 120 Printer Home Page Fig 3 121 Fuser Temperature Window 3 58 PC Setup 2 Select Printer Configuration Print Quality Fuser Temperature fig 3 120 The Fuser Temperature window appears fig 3 121 3 Select the desired media type for the input source fig 3 121 Options for the media type are Paper Heavy Paper Cover Transparency Labels and UserDef User Defined 1 through 5 Paper is the factory default Then click Change 4 Select the desired level of fuser temperature Temperature increases as the options increase from 0 none to 15 hot and the default depends upon the selected media Select 0 none or 1 when printing Myriad film envelopes and paper Select hotter settings for heavy paper heavy film and Myriad plates Then click Change 5 Close your browser NEIT Negative Enhanced Imaging Technology NEIT is a laser power setting that is used for negative prints Choosing a lower setting increases laser power and causes the output to be darker Choosing a higher setting decreases laser power and cause the output to be lighter The NEIT feature allows you to change your defa
58. are satisfied with the results R You also can use the printer s front panel X ACT feature to calibrate dimensions See A Accurate Calibration Technology X ACT in chapter 4 for details Macintosh Setup 2 51 VM Virtual Memory The VM option allows you to adjust the size of your PostScript virtual memory in Megabytes This setting controls the printer s default virtual memory setting at power up 1 Go to the printer home page fig 2 108 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Site i Fig 2 108 Printer Home Page Fig 2 109 VM Window 2 Select Printer Configuration PostScript VM fig 2 108 The VM window appears fig 2 109 3 Select the desired amount of memory to set aside for virtual memory at power up fig 2 109 the minimum value allowed is 9 MB 12 MB is the factory default setting and the maximum value is 4096 of installed RAM Then click Change 4 Close your browser Print Quality EP1 Fuser Temperature NEIT and Print Density Print Quality has EP1 Fuser Temperature NEIT and Print Density options EP1 Electrophotography Toner Control EP1 allows you to control the level of toner transferred from the toner drum to the media to control toning 2 52 Macintosh Setup 1 Go to the printer home page fig 2 110 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 2 110 Printer Home Page Fig 2 111 Default EP1 Window 2
59. cassettes Paper Cassettes The universal cassette included with your printer handles paper sizes from 5 50 x 8 50 140 mm x 216 mm up to 13 00 x 18 50 330 mm x 470 mm and paper weights from 16 28 Ib bond 60 105 g m For a 20 Ib bond 60 Ib text weight 65 g m paper you can load approximately 500 sheets of paper or to a stack height of 2 13 54 mm The optional envelope cassette handles Com 10 Monarch DL and C5 sized envelopes with the same paper weight range as the universal cassette You can load approximately 75 envelopes in the envelope cassette Use the arrow tab on the media guides to select the paper size in the cassette Select the paper cassette or tray chaining from your application Print dialog box or the printer s front panel Multipurpose Feeder The multipurpose feeder handles media sizes from 3 94 x 5 83 100 mm x 148 mm up to 13 00 x 35 50 330 mm x 902 mm and media weights from 16 36 Ib bond 60 135 g m Use the multipurpose feeder extension to support larger media Select the media size from the front panel Utility Manual Feed menu or use the custom size option in your application You can load paper Myriad film transparencies labels and envelopes to a stack height of 70 18 mm in the multipurpose feeder For typical media weights this equals approximately 150 sheets of paper 10 envelopes or 30 sheets of film transparencies or labels Loading Media Select the cassette or multipu
60. click OK The XANT Utilities Main window appears fig 3 67 7 ReRrALE PRINTER An P neris Fig 3 67 XANT Utilities Main Window 2 Click Software Utilities in the XANTE Utilities Main window The Select Utility window appears fig 3 68 3 34 PC Setup pees stein A mas eR aute M degit uer mare Chi ben ba aeei mamei la a ES pal me oe hm Ya i Steer ole Se fy mrem m ee a ees hie 1 J mr a Fig 3 68 Select Utility Window Fig 3 69 Setup Welcome Window 3 Highlight Adobe Type Manager fig 3 68 then click OK Adobe Type Manager ATM launches then the Setup Welcome window appears fig 3 69 4 Read the Setup Welcome window fig 3 69 then click Next The Select Country window appears fig 3 70 ergo mele rio quy ee LE Raum abr mm eritis i E qma m Be mas prr pata al errem m massa mumin pum ee oe Fig 3 70 Select Country Window Fig 3 71 License Agreement Window 5 Highlight the desired country fig 3 70 then click Next The License Agreement window appears fig 3 71 6 Read the license agreement fig 3 71 then click Yes The User Information window appears fig 3 72 PC Setup 3 35 ee bme Ba i Lu us pr LT ain as u oo tom tee burg pr Coram Ribe tee oe o 14 Capre Sar ee jo LOC 1 rien ll Panem i Fig 3 72 User Information Window Fig 3 73 Name Confirma
61. configure the device 2 56 Macintosh Setup To display hard disk settings and configure the device 1 Goto the printer home page fig 2 120 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 2 120 Printer Home Page Fig 2 121 Hard Disk Settings Window 2 Select Printer Configuration Storage Devices Hard Disk fig 2 120 The Hard Disk Settings window appears fig 2 121 showing current settings If you want to reformat the hard disk continue to step 3 if not skip to step 4 3 Click Format a warning window informs you that formatting the disk will erase everything on it If you want to continue click Proceed With Format otherwise continue to step 4 fig 2 122 Fig 2 122 Warning Window 4 Close your browser Ky You also can format a hard disk via the printer s front panel For details see Hard sA Disk in chapter 4 To display RAM disk settings and configure the device 1 Goto the printer home page fig 2 123 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Macintosh Setup 2 57 HE HAUNT Fig 2 123 Printer Home Page Fig 2 124 RAM Disk Settings Window 2 Select Printer Configuration Storage Devices RAM Disk fig 2 123 The RAM Disk Settings window appears fig 2 124 showing current settings If you want to change the capacity setting continue to step 3 to reformat the RAM disk device skip to step 4 Otherwise skip to step 5
62. for details Accelafont ps allows you to set the percentage of ramdisk available for the Font Accelerator feature D PS contains a Control D PostScript s end of job marker for use with applications that do not send a PostScript end of file Description pdf contains an overview of the files in the PS Files folder This file can be printed using Adobe Acrobat 3 0 or later DHCPOFE ps allows you to disable the DHCP protocol DHCPON ps allows you to enable the DHCP protocol Factory ps resets the printer parameters to factory defaults Fonts ps prints a list of the fonts resident on the printer Fontsamp ps prints samples of Adobe PostScript 3 fonts resident on XANTE PostScript 3 printers Initdisk ps file initializes the hard disk installed in your printer Wy You must initialize a hard disk before it can be used to store downloaded fonts factory installed disks are initialized already and ready to be used Initializing a disk erases all information stored on the disk NOTE Netduplex ps is not for use with the FilmMaker 4 printer Netpgoff ps allows you to disable printing the network page which lists protocol settings for EtherTalk IP IPP and LPR as well as Ethernet physical settings 2 36 Macintosh Setup Netpgon ps allows you to enable printing the network page which lists protocol settings for EtherTalk IP IPP and LPR as well as Ethernet physical settings Parmdump ps prints a list of each interface and its curren
63. for faster printing when image quality is not the primary concern Set Fast Imaging from your application Print dialog box None the factory default prints at normal speed and with no data compression Optimized for Quality compresses image data for faster printing than normal but with some usually not noticeable loss of image quality Optimized for Speed implements a greater degree of data compression to provide the fastest print time but with the possibility of a noticeable loss of data quality Ew Optimize selections do not function if the print job contains an image that is masked oly or rotated to anything other than 0 90 180 or 270 Gamma The Gamma feature allows you to adjust printer output for ink media file and environmental conditions For example if a scanned image is too dark you can select a new gamma setting to lighten and enhance the details XANTE provides seven standard gamma curves available through the Gamma menu in the Print dialog box Gamma curves 1 through 5 progressively lighten the midrange values in an image Gamma 0 the factory default makes no change to the image and Gamma 6 produces a reverse negative image without changing the image in the application Graphs in figure 3 25 show the change to the midrange gray levels Ew Depending on the application being used a Printer s Default option may be available A When this option is selected the current printer setting is used for the
64. from the Select Product drop down menu b Select the appropriate program s for which you want to download the drivers from the Application Drivers section EW Even if you are installing this printer to a Network you must first install as a Parallel oY Connection This is to ensure you can configure the printer s IP address Subnet address and Gateway address c Click OK if you chose an application in step 3b a window appears asking if you want to perform a network installation Select Yes to continue installation Fig 3 41 Destination Location Window 3 22 PC Setup 4 Review the application destination folder s if applicable fig 3 41 then click Yes The Add Printer Wizard window appears fig 3 42 Waone m the Adi Printer iai a ES Wizard beep me le hme nee ee Fd re paa ma om E MR eR a Upp paa mipi pepa se mimiem ig mi Fea NEL IL SL ul s pna cg d ne ee GG V Fig 3 42 Add Printer Wizard Window Fig 3 43 Connection Type Window 5 Read the Printer Wizard window and click Next Select the appropriate connection type fig 3 43 then click Next The Select Printer Port Window appears fig 3 44 If you select Local recommended continue on to the next step If you selected Network follow the on screen directions on locating your printer baidi Feran Softee LLL ey Lari in anii nca v es pee ena praa can emi am Pe rper Pa eem LEEREN Hec ee A He Na Lake ac Amin P See HR
65. installed upgrade A controller board upgrade installation involves accessing the controller board installing the upgrade s and reassembling the printer A Static electricity can destroy electronic components such as your controller board SODIMMs firmware and the hard disk Use approved anti static procedures when working with the controller board and upgrades Removing the Controller Board Panel 1 Make sure the printer displays a PLEASE WAIT or READY IDLE message Then turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord and all interface cables 2 Remove any media in the multipurpose feeder and output tray 3 Loosen the two screws on the back of the printer that secure the controller board access panel to the printer fig 7 5 zz BG e E G N Fig 7 5 Loosen Panel Screws Fig 7 6 Remove Panel 4 Slide the panel toward the back of the printer until it stops Pull the panel down and out to remove it from the printer fig 7 6 7 4 Options Figure 7 7 shows upgrade installation locations Screw Hole Screw Hole Screw Hole Parallel IDE Hard Drive Connector IDE Screw Hole mammm LJ g B Screw Hole IDE Hard Drive RAM Slot Area Screw Hole Ethernet gt Screw Hole Screw Hole Screw Hole Fig 7 7 Controller Board Installing Optional Memory Standard RAM configuration for your printer is 64 MB You can upgrade printer memory to 12
66. it says Generic call XANT Technical Support at 800 926 8393 US and Canada 2 10 Macintosh Setup jij New 36N Open 360 Open Recent Close 36W Save 365 Save As OS Save All Revert to Saved Page Setup p Fig 2 20 File Menu Window gp cen em 7 omaes Cantor terry Fig 2 22 Print Window 5 Select File Print The Print window appears fig 2 22 6 Select Print Features from the Print window s drop down menu fig 2 22 Your printer s PPD options are under the Printer Features fig 2 23 Some features may appear in the Print window that do not apply to your printer For example you may see 2400 x 2400 DPI resolution even when your printer does not have this option installed In such cases disregard these listings Pem I uL i Seen amiri Lu Tl m fus i kre ua mari mag 41 roe OR DM t Frae a1 imam Ram im n Fugees teed ri sui dE ETT n Bid tup inim miu iniu m oe i MM reee e nee Fm m i dee CS Fig 2 23 Feature Options Tabs Fig 2 24 Paper Feed Options 7 Select the appropriate options from the drop down menus on the Feature Tabs fig 2 23 See Configuring Printer Options later in this chapter for a description of your printer s options 8 Select Paper Feed from the Print window drop down menu 2 22 When the paper feed options appear fig 2 24 select the desired media source y To save these settings m
67. job PC Setup 3 13 H Gamma 0 Output Levels o 1 a Input Levels du i Gamma 1 H T Gamma 2 P4 d x 2 2 g 2 j iz 1 rE E va 3 a amp E f 5 abo r4 I A O tack Input Levels whi O ack Input Levels White MENSES A Gamma3 g Gamma4 er ed P p E 5 1 2 E A 3 A amp o o y EA H m p 4 4 3 4 4 1 a 0 tack Input Levels white O ack Input Levels White A a r Gamma5 1 a t Gamma 6 L R ELS Hi i Ea N amp 8r Fan sft H H or or O tack Input Levels white O Black Input Levels white Fig 3 25 Gamma Corrections O through 6 Media Weight Media Weight allows you to designate the type of media used and to access correct temperatures for that media Set Media Weight from your application Print dialog box Options are Paper Clear Film Matte Film Heavy Paper Cover Transparency and Labels media weights Mirror Print Mirror Print allows you to produce a mirror image which is reversed left to right fig 3 26 This type of image is used to produce right reading documents required for imaging silk screens or metal plates 3 14 PC Setup gt B OMAHA AVITAVTV YOOJOMHIIT VI AMI 2ononisH qeit as 31A soit bas GIONAHN 3VITAO3A YOOJOVHOZT 9VIOAMI T Fig 3 26 Mirror Image Set Mirror Print from your application Print dialog box To ensure the highest quality when producing mirror images
68. lines are set correctly More X ACT Use XANT s patented X ACT technology to calibrate printer line lengths to exact dimensions You can save a different set of More X ACT values for each different media type your printer supports You need a metric ruler to complete this procedure PC Setup 3 55 1 Go to the printer home page fig 3 114 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 3 114 Printer Home Page Fig 3 115 More X ACT Window 2 Select Printer Configuration PostScript More X ACT fig 3 114 The More X ACT window appears fig 3 115 3 Follow the directions in the More X ACT window to calibrate your printer s output to exact dimensions More X ACT is a cumulative process If you are not satisfied with the calibration you may want to repeat the calibration process Also you can reset calibration values to factory defaults by clicking Reset in the More X ACT window 4 Close your browser after you finish the calibration and are satisfied with the results R You also can use the printer s front panel X ACT feature to calibrate dimensions See b Accurate Calibration Technology X ACT in chapter 4 for details W s z 3 56 PC Setup VM Virtual Memory The VM option allows you to adjust the size of your PostScript virtual memory in Megabytes This setting controls the printer s default virtual memory setting at power up 1 Goto the printer home page fig 3 1
69. lpi may be used measure the lpi that is to be used for final output c Select the desired resolution Options are 600 dpi and 1200 dpi also if you have the 2400 dpi upgrade is installed on your system 2400 dpi will appear d Select Calibration Page and click Print A calibration page prints BEHHNEHENHHENERN EHHHEHHEEHEHHERB BEENNEHEHBERH HEHNEHNHHEHNHEEHB BEHNEHNHENHEBESHE EHNNEEEHNENHNN BHEHHHHEHHURH X J CE a Oe ca ca cal el aa a HEE cal aa al lea ao ca clea EE al al al ll ll el llc lS EBENBHEHHEENH G PTT Ti TT TT ie Fig 3 107 Sample Calibration Page Wy Always print the calibration page using the same media and toner or press ink as used 4 for the final copy Also when possible calibrate from the final output For example when calibrating for heavy paper use heavy paper PC Setup 3 51 e Measure individual patches on the calibration page making sure that you first place the page on a white background See your densitometer documentation for how to take the measurements f Make sure to enter the solid black 1 and solid white 2 measurements first Enter the number of the patch whose densitometer measurement most closely matches within 2 the corresponding percentage in the Enter Coverage Values section For example when you are reading for 296 if the box labeled 7 measures 296 enter the number 7 in the corresponding box FK Calibration page blocks are n
70. manual Acrobat Reader will need to be installed to view this manual 1l Insert the XANT Utilities CD ROM into your PC XANT Utilities Installer should launch automatically If not select Start Run Then browse to the XANTE Utilities CD ROM select XInstall xt_prinst exe in the root directory and click OK The XANT Utilities Main window appears fig 3 84 wrote p FAEH 3 FRE b MANTA suras Fab e di Miis ETAL f Fig 3 84 XANT Utilities Main Menu Fig 3 85 Manual Selection Window Row mw Redpe Fon 5 te T peru het 2 Click View Manuals Acrobat Reader opens and the Manual Selection window appears fig 3 85 PC Setup 3 39 Highlight your choice of manual and click Open fig 3 85 A copy of that printer manual opens View the selected printer manual either the User s Guide fig 3 86 or the Quick Reference Manual fig 3 87 ETT a 1584 AH N Rus us U A m B r a Bi d RAE Fig 3 86 User s Guide A 5 Close the manual file after you finish Then close your internet connection and Acrobat Reader Register Online Usually it is best to register your printer during initial setup However if you select to register later periodically the Registration Preferences window reappears until you register the printer If you are online use the following procedure to register 1 Turn on your printer and then the computer Open your browser and enter your pr
71. menu Off the factory default disables this feature On enables it Printer Timeout The Timeout feature allows you to select the number of seconds the printer waits for additional data before cancelling a job and returning to the Ready Idle state Configuration 4 19 Set Timeout from the Utility Timeout configuration menu The factory default of 40 seconds 40 Sec is an average setting Set timeout according to the type of files you send Use a low setting for small simple files to prevent an indefinite tie up on one job Use the 300 or Never setting for large files such as graphic intensive or CAD Computer Aided Design files to allow enough processing time With the Never selection the printer does not timeout it waits until it receives additional data or until the printer is reset RAM Disk RAM Disk allows you to set aside a section of printer RAM to be used as a read write device for implementing XANT s Font Accelerator Set RAM Disk from the Utility RAM Disk configuration menu 0 the factory default disables RAM disk Options are in 1 MB increments to the maximum available RAM which is the installed RAM minus 32 MB the base amount of RAM required by the system The printer must be restarted for the RAM disk setting to become active Resolution Options DPI The standard configuration is 600 x 600 and 1200 x 1200 dpi resolutions which print at 20 page per minute for letter A4 size paper The optional 2400 x 2400 upgra
72. mes tmm Fig 3 48 Printer Sharing Window Fig 3 49 Print Test Page Window 10 Select your printer s sharing option fig 3 48 If you select Share you can describe the location and capabilities for the printer which may be helpful to other users Click Next The Print Test Page window appears fig 3 49 1l Select your printer s Print Test Page option fig 3 49 then click Next The Completing Add Printer Wizard window appears fig 3 50 3 24 PC Setup Gomplieting thes dick Primer Wied raien mimik comperi im idi are onmi Vx qnc im bala pe rama Web Registration Register Your Printer Online No Fig 3 50 Completing Add Printer Wizard Fig 3 51 Web Registration Window 12 Click Finish when Add Printer Wizard window appears The Web Registration window appears fig 3 51 13 Select Yes or No Then go to the appropriate following step a If you select Yes XANT s web site is accessed automatically and the Registration Form window appears fig 3 52 Fill out and submit the form wu c ums a i e 4 L J Fig 3 52 Registration Form b Ifyou No you return to the Windows desktop Configuring Your Printer s IP Subnet and Gateway Addresses 1l From the ps files folder on the XANTE CD ROM copy dhcpoff ps to your c drive 2 Goto DOS Command Prompt 3 Type the following substituting the appropriate port if necessary PC Setup 3 25 COPY DHCPOFF PS LPT1 J 4
73. minimum type SJT SVT 18 3 rated 250 Volts ac 10 Amps with a maximum length of 15 feet One terminated in an IEC 320 attachment plug The other end is terminated in a NEMA 5 15P plug For 230 Volt Configuration The power cord to be used with 230 Volt configuration is minimum type SJT SVT 18 3 rated 250 Volts ac 10 Amps with a maximum length of 15 feet One terminated in an IEC 320 attachment plug The other end is terminated as required by the country where it will be installed Le cable de transport d energie que doit etre utilis e la configuration 230 Volts est le type minimum SJT SVT 18 3 nominal 250 Volts ac 10 Amps 4 5 m long maximum Un bout est raccorde comme exige par le pays ou il sera utilis e Das Netzkabel ist das haupfsachliche Diskonnektionsmittel es sollte in eine leicht erreichbare steckdos gesteckt werden Das Netzkabel kann mit einer 230 Volts Konfiguration verwonder werden vom typ Minimum VDE or HAR 3 X 1 00 mm 250 V ac 10 Amps maximal 4 5 m long Ein Ende ontspriche dem Stecker IEC 320 Das andoro Ende entspricht den Anfoderungen des entsprechenden Landes Power Conservation As an ENERGY STAR Partner XANTE CORPORATION has determined this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for oer energy efficiency This printer enters a low power state after 30 minutes of inactivity This complies with the U S EPA ENERGY STAR Program but is not an EPA endorsement of the product Manufacturer s D
74. now using the procedure in Install Adobe Acrobat Reader later in this chapter b To view or print your printer s manual to register your printer online if you have not done so already to access XANT s online support or to check Adobe s web site for product updates continue to the appropriate section View Manuals Register Online Access XANTE Online Support or Adobe Web Site Access c To quit the installation process close the Main Installation window fig 2 39 then restart your computer AdobePS Driver Manual Installation To load the AdobePS Printer driver manually L 2 3 4 Insert the XANT Utilities CD ROM into your Macintosh When the Main Installation window appears close it and the setup program Double click the Utilities CD ROM icon Go to the Drivers AdobePS ENG or appropriate language folder Double click the AdobePS Installer icon and follow the on screen instructions The AdobePS driver requires the following system setup Apple Power Macintosh running System 8 6 or later AdobePS does not run on Macintosh 68K computers At least 4 MB of memory 2 16 Macintosh Setup At least 3 1 MB of hard disk space plus the space required for the PPDs each PPD is approximately 75 K Apple ColorSync 2 0 1 if using the AdobePS ColorSync features AdobePS does not support ColorSync 1 X Y AdobePS is not compatible with Apple QuickDraw GX NOTE NS AdobePS provides
75. of my document printed Make sure the document size in your application s page setup matches the document size specified in the Print dialog box Printer Printer Tila Film and FilmStar 4 Specific Issues This section addresses film and FilmStar 4 specific issues The toner flakes Your printer s fuser temperature setting may be set too low See Fuser Temperature in chapter 4 The toner bleeds The FilmStar Solution may need to be changed See the FilmStar 4 User s Guide Film scratches or the image distorts bleeds during FilmStar 4 processing Be sure that you use only Myriad Film and the correct XANTE FilmStar Solution for your printer in the FilmStar 4 Use FilmStar 4 FX Solution with the FilmMaker 4 printer Make sure that the film is inserted toner side up into the FilmStar 4 6 10 Troubleshooting Clean the rollers Dust and debris on the rollers can cause scratching or displacement of toner Also FilmStar 4 Solution can dry and build up on the rollers See the FilmStar 4 User s Guide Clean the FilmStar 4 s solution tray Foreign matter may be in the tray See the FilmStar 4 User s Guide Be sure you guide the film as it exits the output slot You should pull it slightly to the back as it exits the FilmStar 4 so that the film does not get scratched on the front edge of the output slot FilmStar Solution needs to be changed See the FilmStar 4 User s Guide Small type plugs fi
76. option allows you to check your printer s E Prom s status 2 60 Macintosh Setup 1 Goto the printer home page fig 2 131 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 2 131 Printer Home Page Fig 2 132 Diagnostic Information Window 2 Select Printer Information Diagnostic Information fig 2 131 The Diagnostic Information window appears fig 2 132 3 Check the right side of the window fig 2 132 to determine the condition of your printer s E Prom y If the E Prom condition is good you don t have to do anything if it is bad or missing EM A contact XANT Technical support 4 Close your browser General Information The General Information option lists miscellaneous printer details These include the product name PostScript version current firmware revision boot RAM version RAM size engine speed page count and PostScript margin settings as well as whether the startup page and low toner page printing is enabled on or disabled off 1 Goto the printer home page fig 2 133 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Macintosh Setup 2 61 Fig 2 133 Printer Home Page Fig 2 134 General Information Window 2 Select Printer Information General Information fig 2 133 The General Information window appears fig 2 134 3 Check the desired printer information fig 2 134 then close your browser I O Settings I O settings has AppSocket EtherTalk
77. path and covers using the paper cassettes the optional paper feeders and the multipurpose feeder Media Path Figure 5 1 illustrates the media path in your printer Fuser Output Tray Toner Cartridge Drum Multipurpose Feeder Standard N Optional N Sa ea Trays HSS SSeS Paper path when trays 2 3 are installed Fig 5 1 Printer Media Path 1 Media is pulled from the multipurpose feeder or a paper cassette 2 The image is transferred to the media from the drum 3 Toner is fixed on the media by the fuser 4 The paper is delivered into the output tray Media Sources Your printer is equipped with a built in paper cassette feeder and a multipurpose tray these provide an input capacity of approximately 650 sheets of standard 20 Ib bond 60 Ib text weight 65 g m paper You can add optional paper feeders to increase input capacity 5 4 Media Selecting Handling and Printing Paper feeders support both the universal cassette supplied with your printer and the optional envelope cassette All media sources can be used to increase the capacity for a single media size with the tray chaining option or as sources for different sizes or types of media Optional Paper Feeders You can add up to two optional paper cassette feeders to your printer to increase input capacity for standard paper to approximately 1 650 sheets Chapter 7 covers installing feeders Chapter 1 covers loading paper
78. replacing the toner cartridge Fuser Assembly Cleaning 1 Turn off and unplug the printer o Allow fuser assembly to cool before removing 2 Open the fuser cover assembly fig 6 1 Fig 6 1 Fuser Assembly 3 Loosen but do not remove the two thumb screws located on the right side of the printer Maintenance and Specifications 6 3 4 Lift up on the right side of the fuser assembly using the orange tab Pull the right side of the fuser toward you while sliding the entire unit to the right Then lift the assembly out of the printer using the orange tabs 5 After removing the fuser assembly pull down on the two green tabs to open the unit 6 Clean both rollers with denatured alcohol and a lint free cloth Turn the fusing unit upside down to access the fusing roller o To prevent printer damage wipe area lightly do not rub 7 Vacuum the area using a soft brush attachment or blow compressed air into the printer oc Wear protective safety glasses when using compressed air A Do not pull out any wires while performing this step 8 Slide the left side of the fuser assembly under the metal bracket and lower into place 9 Tighten the two screws Then close the fuser cover assembly Transfer Roller Cleaning 1 Turn off and unplug the printer 2 Remove the toner cartridge 3 Remove the roller assembly by turning up the roller s plastic levers one on each end fig 6 2 then holding the levers l
79. some software misinterprets the messages If you run into problems with particular software try disabling this feature Spot Function Enhanced Screening and Dot Shape The Spot Function feature controls both Enhanced Screen and dot shape options XANT s Enhanced Screening Technology allows you to increase the number of levels of gray produced for a line screen setting Shape options allow you to select the shape of dots that make up the screen pattern for printing the calibration and verification pages Shape options include Line Round and Ellipse If you select one of these shapes in the Spot Function menu the correct Enhanced Screen level of gray is activated automatically However you can set enhanced screening without selecting a screen shape Set Enhanced Screening from the Graphic Spot Function configuration menu or the Print dialog box Enhanced Screens menu Normal the factory default uses the line screen set in your application Enhanced Screening options are 145 Gray Levels 197 Gray Levels and 256 Gray Levels The following chart lists the line screen setting for each option at different resolutions Levels Line Screens of Gray 600 dpi 1200 dpi 2400 dpi 145 70 lpi 140 Ipi 282 lpi 197 60 lpi 120 Ipi 242 lpi 256 53 Ipi 106 Ipi 212 lpi Configuration 4 21 R Accurate Screens is active in the PPD only if the Enhanced Screens menu is set to b v4 Normal NOT Start up Page The Start up Page feature prints a pag
80. to an optional hard disk on the printer and RAM disk is enabled for 1 MB or more Set Font Accelerator from the Utility Font Accel configuration menu Options are 0 20 40 60 80 and 100 These options indicate the percentage of RAM disk that the Font Accelerator can use The factory default is 100 4 12 Configuration Fuser Temperature The Fuser Temperature feature allow you to adjust the printer s fuser temperature for the type of media used Set the fuser temperature from the Fuser front panel menu Temperature increases as the options increase from 0 none to 15 hot and the default depends upon the selected media Select 0 none or 1 when printing Myriad film envelopes and paper Select hotter settings for heavy paper and heavy film Halftone Calibration Technology Gamma XANT s Halftone Calibration Technology allows you to adjust printer output for ink media file and environmental conditions For example if a scanned image is too dark you can select a new gamma setting to lighten and enhance the details Gamma corrections bring out details that can be lost when printing at higher line screens or when dark photos are scanned XANTE provides seven standard gamma correction curves and you can create up to seven custom curves You can select any custom or standard gamma curve on a job by job basis using the front panel Graphic Gamma configuration menu or the Print dialog box Gamma menu XANTE Gamma curves 1 through
81. typically associated with producing negative images on a laser printer 4 18 Configuration Previously when a negative print was produced on a laser printer gray scales were distorted and small spaces in text and lines were obscured by toner bleed NEIT addresses these problems allowing you to adjust toner application when producing a negative image to obtain crisp clean lines and text The image on the right in figure 4 11 illustrates how NEIT can improve a negative print limes Ron Times Roman Italic Times Roman Malic 6 pt Mepative Print fumes Rows Mair Fig 4 11 NEIT Difference Set NEIT from the Paper Neit configuration menu As menu settings increase from 0 to 20 the amount of plugging decreases The factory default is 10 This menu appears only if the NEIT upgrade is installed and is active only if Negative Print is set to True in the Print dialog box Paper Mode The paper cassette media guides activate cams which notify the printer of the paper size Because some international and North American paper sizes are very similar in size the Utility PaperMode configuration menu specifies whether the cassette setting is for North American paper sizes US or for International paper sizes Euro Power Save Power Save conserves power when the printer is not in use When enabled this feature puts the printer into a low power state after 30 minutes of inactivity Set Power Save from the Utility Power Save configuration
82. used a toner cartridge for several days toner may have settled and need to be redistributed for consistent coverage See Redistributing Toner later in this chapter for details AS Density The Density menu Utility Density allows you to control the toner intensity Options include 0 Light 1 2 3 4 Normal the factory default 5 6 and 7 Dark The amount of toner applied to your job increases as the setting number increases You also can increase or decrease the amount of toner laid down using the print density dial See Adjusting Print Density later in this chapter for more details y If you have not used a toner cartridge for several days toner may have settled and need to be redistributed for consistent coverage See Redistributing Toner later in this chapter for details Configuration 4 11 Electrophotography EP1 Toner Control The EP1 menu helps reduce toning by controlling the level of toner transferred from the toner drum to the media Options are 0 up to 15 The default setting depends on the selected media The default setting for paper and film is 10 Laser printers react differently in changing humidity and temperature situations The EPI feature allows you to adjust toner to compensate for these environmental changes to achieve the printer s best possible output quality The lower the EP1 value the more toner will be transferred to the image However a very low setting may create so much toning that
83. 16 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 3 116 Printer Home Page Fig 3 117 VM Window 2 Select Printer Configuration PostScript VM fig 3 116 The VM window appears fig 3 117 3 Select the desired amount of memory to set aside for virtual memory at power up fig 3 117 the minimum value allowed is 9 MB 12 MB is the factory default setting and the maximum value is 40 of installed RAM Then click Change 4 Close your browser Print Quality EP1 Fuser Temperature NEIT and Print Density The Print Quality option allow you to select toner level and fuser temperature EP1 Electrophotography 1 The EPI option allows you to reduce toning by controlling the level of toner transferred from the toner drum to the media 1 Goto the printer home page fig 3 118 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details PC Setup 3 57 Fig 3 118 Printer Home Page Fig 3 119 EP1 Window 2 Select Printer Configuration Print Quality EP1 fig 3 118 The EP1 window appears fig 3 119 3 Select the desired media type for the input source fig 3 119 Options for the media type are Paper Heavy Paper Cover Transparency Labels and UserDef User Defined 1 through 5 Paper is the factory default Then click Change 4 Select the desired level of toner control Options are 0 through 15 The default setting depends on the selected media The default setting for paper
84. 2 Pees Ores Tim Lae fied Te Fist imma Taper en tutte HADA M eae reni Lint wo aire imi iiiki LAA M RAM a 7h mna OET Tani E imr Chow easier nez uc LES E apo Chap Fi Rib 2 11 Printer List Fig 2 12 Printer Info Window 2 Select Installable Options from the top drop down menu fig 2 12 Then uncheck any options not installed on your printer and select the appropriate resolution and memory shown on your startup page Installable options configuration is available only on OS X 10 2 and above 3 Click Apply Changes fig 2 12 Then close the window 6 Locate the Text Edit program Hard Drive Applications TextEdit and open it fig 2 13 Then type a few words into the file to check the settings and features for your printer Fig 2 13 Locate Text Edit Macintosh Setup 2 7 NOTE T Ki You can try any application at this time but this procedure checks the PPD for the correct features in the OS X system without having to use another third party product 7 Go to File Page Setup When the Setup window appears fig 2 14 make sure your printer appears in the Format for drop down menu If it says Generic call XANTE Technical Support at 800 926 8393 US and Canada 8 Check the Paper size drop down menu to make sure the standard paper sizes for your printer appear fig 2 15 Click OK Lied a hed Eme Cam Aahas
85. 2 75 Remove Balloon Help from the Quark folder for QuarkXPress 3 3 2 ScenicSoft Preps Folder The ScenicSoft Preps folder contains PPD and PDX files for your printer Print Install installs these files automatically if you have the ScenicSoft Preps application on your system 000 2 76 Macintosh Setup CHAPTER 3 PC Setup This chapter covers connecting the printer and installing utilities drivers and related files on PC hosts Port Connections This section covers parallel and Ethernet connections Parallel Connection To connect via the parallel port 1 Turn off your printer and PC 36 pin Connector 25 pin Connector To Printer To Host Computer Fig 3 1 Parallel Cable 2 Plug the cable s 36 pin connector into the printer s parallel port fig 3 1 and the 25 pin connector into the computer s parallel port 3 Turn on your printer and computer 4 Verify that the printer s parallel interface is enabled and configured for ECP or bi directional parallel port mode in your computer setup i e BIOS or CMOS See your computer documentation for how to access your BIOS CMOS setup Before using your printer install and configure the Adobe PostScript printer driver and your printer s PPD using the appropriate procedures later in this chapter Ethernet Connection To connect via the Ethernet port 1 Turn off your printer 2 Connect the printer to the appropriate port for the cable used on your network
86. 26 5 kg without the toner cassettes and media installed Always have two people lift the printer using the recessed grip areas on the right and left sides l 2 5 Turn off the printer then unplug the power cord from the power source Remove all media from the multipurpose feeder and close it and if necessary the top cover See chapter 1 for instructions Remove any installed optional feeder or duplexer see chapter 7 Options for details Never move the printer with an optional feeder or the optional duplexer installed Remove the toner cartridge following the procedure in chapter 1 Never move the printer with the cartridge installed a Place the cartridge in its original bag to protect it from light If you no longer have this bag place the cartridge in a dark bag or wrap it in a dark cloth b Ensure the cartridge stays level during the move Rock it gently to redistribute toner before reloading the cartridge in the printer See Toner Cartridge in chapter 1 Remove all interface cables and the power cord 6 2 Maintenance and Specifications 6 Move the printer to a location that meets the guidelines in Printer Location in chapter 1 7 Set up the printer following the instructions in chapter 1 Cleaning the Printer To help keep your printer running smoothly and avoid unnecessary problems perform the following cleaning steps monthly Also clean the printer inside after removing a paper jam or
87. 4 USB 1 19 Calibration G 1 Calibration page 4 25 Cancel job Reset key 4 2 Timeout 4 19 Cassette Capacity 1 11 5 5 Envelope 5 5 Jammed 8 12 Loading media 5 5 Optional 1 7 5 5 Standard 1 7 5 5 Tray chaining 4 24 4 25 5 6 Catch up G 2 Cautions 1 3 Cleaning the printer 6 6 Compacted toner 1 10 Controller board 7 7 Cover springs 8 16 Drum shutter 8 17 Jams 1 13 1 14 Media guidelines 1 11 5 1 Media specifications 1 13 Multipurpose feeder 1 14 4 23 8 15 Pinched fingers 8 16 PostScript errors 2 70 Printer inside area 1 10 Refilled cartridges 1 8 Static electricity 7 4 7 5 7 7 Toner cartridge 1 8 1 10 8 17 Toner cartridge tape 1 10 Wires 6 4 CD ROM XANTE Utilities 1 7 CD_ROM Feature access 2 34 PostScript files 2 34 Programs 2 34 Chaining trays 2 23 5 6 Character set G 2 G 10 Chooser Auto setup 2 18 Manual setup 2 18 Class A compliance iii Cleaning Caution 6 6 Exterior 6 6 Fuser assembly 6 3 Manual feed area 6 5 Toner area 6 5 Transfer roller 6 4 Clear font cache 2 36 Coated paper G 2 Colophon manual vi ColorSync 2 17 Configuration EtherTalk 2 1 IP address 4 15 PPD Macintosh 2 18 Printer 2 36 3 42 4 9 Configuration menus 4 3 Dpimenu 4 20 Font Accel menu 4 12 Gamma menu 4 13 Interfaces menu 4 4 Jam Recovery menu 4 15 Language menu 4 16 LPR menus 4 15 Main menus 4 4 Manual Feed menu 4 17 Paper Mode menu 4 19 Power Save menu 4 19 RAM Disk menu 4 20 Screen menu 4 21 Start Page menu 4 22 Tim
88. 5 progressively lighten midrange grayscale values in an image Gamma 0 the factory default makes no change to the image and Gamma 6 produces a reverse negative image without changing the image in the application The graphs in figure 4 8 show the changes to the midrange gray levels for Gamma curves 0 through 6 You may want to create and download up to seven custom gamma curves to calibrate your printer for specific conditions Also linearization can be used to the level of accuracy you need See the linearization section in PostScript Features AccelaFont DPI Linearization LPI Margins More X ACT and VM in chapter 2 Macintosh or 3 PC about creating custom gamma curves Configuration 4 13 i Gamma 0 Output Levels Output Levels N Output Levels White N k o 1 em Input Levels mS e r Gammai pa Gamma2 L E B 7 L Pd p of p 2 Pd ip va E x B amp ra amp D or o ff L E L K As 8 D ip O black Input Levels white O ack Input Levels White ig Gamma3 Gamma4 Blaci Input Levels White 2 E A LI an 2 E Gamma 6 Gamma5 White white HI a af p ov 3r 5H sr S y Hi oy or H Ean ia Bui 1111 O Black Input Levels white O Black Input Levels white 05 05 Fig 4 8 Gamma Corrections O through 6 Hard Disk The Hard Disk feature only appears if you have the o
89. 66 Your web browser launches and takes you to the product Adobe s web site 3 Follow instructions on Adobe s site to locate and download any desired files 4 Close your web browser when you are finished When the Main Installation window reappears fig 2 165 close it Older Application Support Older applications sometimes requires special files This section covers several of those files Also XANT s web site www xante com has details on working with some older popular programs Application PPDs and PDFs Files PPD and PDF files are required for a variety of applications including PageMaker QuarkXPress and ScenicSoft Preps The XANT Utilities CD ROM contains these files for your printer PPD and PDF files are loaded onto your system during the Install Printer process 2 74 Macintosh Setup App Drivers Folder Some Adobe PageMaker and FreeHand versions QuarkXPress and ScenicSoft Preps applications require specialized files in addition to the standard PPD supplied for your printer These files are in the OS8_9 App Drivers folder on the XANTE s CD ROM Some advanced XANTE printer features may not be available when using older application versions Also APD Adobe Printer Description files for Adobe PageMaker versions 4 01 and earlier are available from XANTE Technical Support PageMaker 5 PPD Folder The PageMaker 5 PPD folder contains your printer s PM5 PPD for Aldus PageMaker versions 4 2 to 5 0 and Aldus
90. 68 3 45 3 65 3 72 4 25 Low toner page printing 2 56 Index l 7 LPI 2 42 2 46 3 48 4 16 LPR 2 62 3 66 LPR information page 2 64 LPR mode configuring 3 30 LPR protocol 4 15 LPR tool 3 17 M Macintosh Adobe PostScript driver 2 11 EtherTalk zone name 2 2 Selecting PPD options 4 5 Standard procedures 2 1 Macintosh OS versions 2 2 OS X installation 2 4 Macintosh OS X Configuring 2 9 Macintosh Utilities Downloader 2 34 2 35 PS Files folder 2 36 Maintenance 6 1 Cleaners 6 6 Cleaning the printer 6 3 Exterior cleaning 6 6 Fuser assembly cleaning 6 3 Manual feed area cleaning 6 5 Toner area cleaning 6 5 Transfer roller cleaning 6 4 Man Feed menu 4 17 Manual feed tray Double sided printing 5 7 Labels 5 9 Manual feed 5 5 Regular feed 5 5 Transparencies 5 10 Manual LED 4 2 Manuals Conventions 1 3 Copyright iii Notice iii Overview 1 1 Safety information iii User s guide 1 1 1 7 View 2 30 3 39 F8 Index Margin G 6 Margin settings 2 61 3 65 Margins 2 42 2 47 3 48 Media Coated 5 1 Creased 8 8 Crumpled 8 8 Curl 5 1 Custom sized 5 3 Default input tray 2 58 Double feeds 8 7 Embossed 5 1 Envelopes 5 9 Fuser temperature 4 13 4 16 Handling 1 4 5 4 Jams 8 12 Loading 5 5 Path 5 4 Perforated 5 1 Selecting 5 1 Size 1 4 Sizes 1 4 1 11 1 13 5 2 6 8 Sources 5 4 Specifications 5 1 Storage 5 1 Textured 5 1 Transparencies 5 10 Types 1 5 1 11 1 13 2 59 5 3 Weight 1 4 Weights 1 11 1 13 5 3 Media
91. 8 MB or 256 MB You can only install one SODIMM upgrade on the controller board This means that if you upgrade to 128 MB and later decided to upgrade to 256 MB you have to replace the 128 MB SODIMM with the 256 SODIMM If you purchase RAM from a vendor other than XANTE XANTE cannot guarantee the performance of that RAM XANTE tests show some vendor s RAM manufactured to specifications is incompatible with our printers rA AS Static electricity can destroy the printer s electronic components Always use an antistatic procedure when working with the controller board Use an anti static wristband or touch an unpainted metal surface to eliminate static electricity before handling a circuit board When handling a board always hold it by the edges and avoid walking around particularly on carpeted surfaces Options 7 5 To install a memory upgrade l Access the controller board following the procedure in Removing the Controller Board Panel earlier in this chapter 2 Remove the SODIMM from its package 3 Open the end latches on the RAM memory bank by rotating them out and down fig 7 8 Fig 7 8 Open Bank Latches EW If this is not the first memory upgrade you must remove the initial upgrade from the SA memory bank before installing the new upgrade When you open the bank latches the old upgrade pops up automatically lift it straight up and out of the bank 4 Install the new RAM SODIMM fig 7 8 a Alig
92. Calibration XANTE technology that provides densitometer support to calibrate printer output for specific inks media and environmental conditions See also Dot Gain and Dot Gain Calibration Default Settings Values or settings used by your printer if no other direction is received from an application Printer default settings can be changed using the printer front panel and some settings can be changed online through XANTE browser utilities See also Factory Default Settings Densitometer A device that produces a set light source and measures the transmission of light through or reflection of light from a surface compared to a common density standard Density A measurement of the transmission of light through or reflection of light from a surface For example the thicker denser the ink the less light it reflects Dot Gain The result of media absorbing ink which causes the ink to spread out rather than forming a crisp precise pattern This gives the appearance of a gain in value of the tint For example an 80 magenta tint may appear to be 83 because of dot gain See also Tint Dot Gain Calibration XANTE technology that provides gamma control to adjust image grayscale values to help compensate for dot gain See also Dot Gain and Custom Dot Gain Calibration Downloaded Font A font that has been transferred to the memory or hard disk of a printer G 2 Glossary DPI Dots Per Inch The number of dots that can be produced
93. E vendor If the feature is enabled and toner is low the reorder form prints every 250 pages Set Toner Page from the Utility Toner Page configuration menu Yes the factory default enables this feature No disables it Tray Selection Options You can select a specific tray as the default media source or you can use tray chaining to automatically switch to another source for media when the current source is empty Configuration 4 23 Selecting a Specific Tray Use the Tray Select control key or your application s options to select a specific tray as the media source The Tray Select key allows you to scroll through tray options in the window Options are man feed multipurpose feeder cassette standard cassette upper optional and lower optional The last two selections appear only if these optional trays are installed In most Macintosh applications use the Print dialog box Paper Source options to specify the media tray The All pages from options allow you to choose a specific tray or use the printer s default to print all pages of a job The First page from and Remaining from options allow you to specify one tray for the first page and a different tray for the rest of the print job In most PC applications you can specify the media tray on the Paper Source tab of the Page Setup dialog box or on the Paper tab of the Print dialog box s Properties section The AutoSelect Tray option directs the printer to use the media sour
94. Enter Curve Linearize to create a new curve and download it to your printer The Densitometer Data Entry window appears fig 3 171 4 Click Linearize The new curve replaces the existing curve on your printer The Linearization window reappears fig 3 172 5 Click Close the Linearization window closes Then select File Exit to close the Advanced Graphics Center More X ACT Use XANT Advanced Graphics Center s More X ACT feature to calibrate printer line lengths and correct inaccuracies in printing width height skew and angle R You must have Advanced Graphics Center and your printer s current PPD installed A before you can use Advanced Graphics Center s More X ACT You also will need a 1 2 millimeter ruler 1 Select More X ACT from the Setup window fig 3 174 The More X ACT window appears fig 3 175 3 80 PC Setup Fig 3 174 AGC Setup Window Fig 3 175 More X ACT Window 2 Make sure that the same type of media you will use for final printing is loaded in the printer 3 Select the media type you are using from the Media Type drop down menu RY Each media type can only have one set of options For example if you calibrate for SAY A 9 5 x 11 letter paper choose Paper as your media type If you also calibrate for 11 x 17 tabloid paper choose User defined 1 as your media type 4 Check Options to make sure the paper media source and print settings are correct If any of the settings a
95. Env 16 MB 32 MB 128 MB C5 Env 16 MB 32 MB 128 MB DL Env 16 MB 32 MB 128 MB Monarch Env 16 MB 32 MB 128 MB B5 16 MB 32 MB 128 MB Letter A4 16 MB 32 MB 128 MB B4 16 MB 32 MB 128 MB Legal 16 MB 32 MB 128 MB 11 x 17 A3 16 MB 64 MB 160 MB 13 x 18 5 16 MB 64 MB 256 MB 13 x 35 5 32 MB 128 MB N A The 2400 dpi resolution is optional Warranty and Service Options XANTE recommends that only XANTE trained service engineers perform service on your printer In addition to the one year limited warranty XANTE offers a cross ship exchange program and an on site service plan for users in the United States and Canada XANTE provides a one year limited warranty against defects in material and workmanship on your printer See Limited Warranty later in this chapter To obtain warranty service call customer support for an RMA Return Material Authorization number and return your printer to the XANTE Customer Repair Center freight prepaid For locations within the United States and Canada XANTE repairs your printer within five business days With XANT s cross ship exchange program a replacement printer is cross shipped to you if the XANT technician determines that the problem cannot be resolved over the phone or with replacement parts This plan is designed to minimize printer downtime and includes an option for an additional fee which allows you to bypass all repair attempts and receive a cross shipped replacement printer immediately
96. Format hard disk 4 14 FreeHand 2 75 PPD 2 75 Front panel 4 1 Duplex key 4 2 Enter key 4 3 Form Feed key 4 2 Keys 4 2 Lights 4 1 Menu key 4 3 Online key 4 2 Reset key 4 2 Selecting options 4 3 Test key 4 3 Tray Select key 4 2 Window 4 1 X ACT 4 9 Fuser 8 7 Cooling time 8 18 Temperature 8 18 Warming up status message 8 3 Warning 6 3 Warning label 8 18 Fuser assembly 6 3 Fuser menu 4 13 4 16 Fuser temperature 2 53 3 57 3 58 4 13 4 16 8 10 G Gamma 1 5 2 20 3 13 6 8 l 6 Index Correction G 4 Curve G 4 Curves 2 20 PPD option 4 9 Gamma menu 4 13 Gateway 4 15 G 4 General network configuration 3 46 Ghosting G 4 Graphic G 4 Graphic Software Package Densitometer support 4 13 Enhanced Screening Technology 4 21 Halftone Calibration Technology 4 13 X ACT 4 9 Gray levels 4 21 Gray scales 4 19 Grayscale G 4 H Halftone G 4 Halftone Calibration Technology 4 13 Halftone calibration technology 6 8 Hard disk 2 56 2 57 4 14 G 4 G 5 Format 4 14 Initializing Macintosh 2 36 Initializing PC 3 42 Heavy paper 2 60 Media weight 2 21 3 14 4 17 Help 2 69 Hickeys G 4 Highlight dot G 4 Holdout G 5 Humidity Media storage 6 2 I I F menu 4 4 I O settings 2 62 3 66 IDE G 5 IDE hard disk 7 4 7 7 Installing 7 11 IDE hard drive 1 5 7 7 IDE upgrade 7 7 IEEE G 5 Imageable area 5 2 G 5 Imagesetter G 5 Impression G 5 InitdskX ps 2 36 3 42 Initializing Hard disk Macintosh 2 36 Hard disk PC 3 42
97. H 16 24 413 mm with no options 73 3 lbs 33 2 kg with cassette 50 to 90 Fahrenheit 10 to 32 Celsius 15 to 85 relative humidity without rapid changes Air pressure 760 1013 hpa 570 760 mmHg Adobe PostScript 3 136 PostScript fonts Types 1 3 4 5 and 6 PostScript download font support Maintenance and Specifications 6 7 Interfaces Resolutions Memory Media size XANTE Features Toner cartridge Standard Parallel Ethernet EtherTalk LPR TCP IP IPP and USB PC only 600 x 600 dpi and 1200 x 1200 dpi standard and 2400 x 2400 optional 64 MB RAM standard Upgradeable to 256 MB 3 94 x 5 83 100 mm x 148 mm to 13 00 x 35 50 330 mm x 902 mm Halftone Calibration Technology Gamma Enhanced Screening Technology More X ACT Accurate Calibration Technology patented Densitometer support 7 000 sheets letter 5 coverage Printer Memory Requirements Memory requirements vary depending on the print resolution media size and duplexing mode The following chart lists the minimum available memory required to print typical configurations Available memory is equal to the total RAM installed minus the amount of RAM Disk enabled see RAM Disk in chapter 4 Complex files large files or those with heavy graphics may require more than the standard memory to print 6 8 Maintenance and Specifications Minimum Memory Requirements Media 600 dpi 1200 dpi 2400 dpi COM10
98. Loss nrnna Behr dE ga Bota ederet loci bebo iie R E 2 34 CD ROM PostScript Files and Programs Feature Access 2 34 Using Adobe Doswinlodd6F uiuos beripetn tetuer ERR R Eni qe Er ots n beste REE 2 34 File MICHI eH anian quu tasitataa He US EUH td Hel ae 2 35 SPECIES a eeaeee etapas ud apu ud uU deb I QU QUIM ON UE uMUNE 2 35 PS Muliz dao s MR 2 36 Using the Browser Feature A GCOS 6 es rospuup da qund uiae ui iau mi pda ped rnt 2 37 Printer Home Pace etait aaaea anaa a aaae a aiiai aiae asiten 2 37 Printer Conb suat DEL enseres ee A A AEEA EERE 2 38 Informational Pages Start Page Low Toner Page and Network Page 2 38 Network EtherTalk General and TCP IP Configuration 2 39 PostScript Features AccelaFont DPI Linearization LPI Margins More AC Ts and VM o eeietbetesitvstentatistecibintietieteitiiteieieteistieties 2 42 Print Quality EP1 Fuser Temperature NEIT and Print Density 2 52 Reset Factor y DODaulis cancesrananseresnicnasnacneantupe seee eE eE esaeas 2 56 Storage Devices Hard Disk and RAM Disk vc uinssdvnswendsnndsendenncnendsienssions 2 56 Maysand Modiana aAA E E E A E E E E 2 58 Printer DH OPIHAEIOH eeaeee ee REA E A E bod EE EE 2 60 Diagnostic Informatio siese aese e eee e eee eean 2 60 General Dao matone degens Dei perii EE E E ERES 2 61 LORTE netee e E upasisuduanaunes teasietaeaensunamennpaaanuanaaaausy 2 62 lt AN MUAY aeneae eea ee E E E EE E E ER 2 65
99. M SODIMM Small Outline Dual Insertion Memory Module A small compact circuit board containing RAM Random Access Memory chips Your printer uses SODIMMs for RAM upgrades See also SIMM Spectrophotometer A device that measures light wavelengths reflected or transmitted by an object The measurements are plotted to create a spectral curve which is compared to a standard such as a color matching chart The difference between the two curves is used to generate a transfer curve Spot color A single color assigned to a specific graphic or text image area and printed without color separation Style Defines a typeface in terms of weight slant and proportion Glossary G 9 Start up Page A setting on most XANTE printers that prints a page with basic printer information such as name page count RAM size and hard disk setup TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol A set of protocols designed to connect different types of networks Tint A single shade of color or gray such as 10 gray or 20 magenta Toning Toner Scatter When stray particles of toner appear on final output Static electricity causes extra stray toner particles to adhere to direct plate media before printing Transfer Curve Files which describe the difference between printer output and a color standard Transfer curves are used to adjust the printer output for hardware ink and media anomalies to produce predictable standardized output T
100. Marae Gh Warranty eee eo t NH MONIO ARE I pu DUI ERU aaee iaaiiai iiaa dedia iaai 6 10 Effect of Consumables on Warranty usas tin FEE UEPEREN EH OLEO DUAL EUER DIUI YER LIA 6 11 Chapter PS CODIGOS eon ues Seehccce ces ai een nd Eea esc cand seae Peat sueeeensesepcsetes 7 1 CEGUBUGE DIE n pd ca eB A dtu Mu TRU LEAD A MO EAD DUUM 7 1 Printer Options ote edendo na dade dada daten deudas 7 1 Paper Handling Options giucicscusyesssdesnivceesusniavisncasicinseadsiusnseieiuseiaeiedeuiesusnnvsedesuns 7 1 Paper Cassette Feeder seed OUO HEDUEHIEDUR UE DD DOES UEIURE IRIURE ELE DIENEN 7 1 Installing the Paper Cassette Feedetuuu usar dra phe rta ig enar vti pO PU cR 0d 7 1 Removing the Paper Cassette Feeder isisissississsssaniosennnisetonsisaniosassansatonsanioiaa 7 3 Controller Board U parades ede tiecerrita eder denied 7 4 Removing the Controller Board Patiel este ep PPP HE PHEE RM AO PI MU PRIU 7 4 Installing Optional Memory csecnca etim ase nasus ia sadi a Ra NERA 7 5 Installing the IDE Hard Disk Upgrade sscasicisssaestsoncasistescasantessasantaiaasaelasaneibioionsiiens 7 7 Removing the Controller BDeNL use inpeedenedepdeedpibdbrednidore din rds oodd 7 7 Installing the IDE Hard TDs s ascdeiniesasesidetessesetasedeloluseneitiusaaatedeieiadedulosasidelosas 7 11 Reinstalling the Controller Board aie mi eri e arie dod aue da 7 12 Reinstalling the Controller Board Panel eei te tote IRI EHS Ep Ree PHP RIF H Rin 7 14 Resolution UDSTQUeS snae ianuis vci rv ni GR LR
101. ND PROPERTY AND ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING REPROGRAMMING OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH XANTE CORPORATION PRODUCTS Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you also may have other rights which vary from state to state ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO ONE 1 YEAR FROM THE DATE OF ORIGINAL PURCHASE OF THE FILMMAKER 4 PRINTER THE WARRANTY SET FORTH ABOVE IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHERS ORAL OR WRITTEN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED 6 10 Maintenance and Specifications Effect of Consumables on Warranty We recommend you use only XANTE parts and consumables in your printer To order call your preferred XANTE dealer or your XANTE Consumables Sales Representative at 800 540 7091 US and Canada Your warranty and maintenance contracts are not affected by using non XANTE products However any damages resulting from or repairs required due to use of non XANTE products are not covered if this happens time and materials costs are charged 000 Maintenance and Specifications 6 11 6 12 Maintenance and Specifications Chapter 7 Options Introduction This chapter describes available printer options
102. O mort mg MEO YOOJOVH23T SVIOAMI d 4 E Fig 4 9 Mirror Image Multipurpose Feeder Media Sizes Manual Feed Set the media size used in the multipurpose feeder from the Utility Manual Feed configuration menu The factory default media size is Letter other options are Configuration 4 17 Legal A3 C5 Env envelope A4 Executive Universal 13 x 18 5 B4 Com 10 envelope Custom B5 Monarch envelope 11x17 DL Env envelope To print on a media size not listed in the Manual Feed menu select Custom and select the paper size through your application See Media Sizes in chapter 5 for a description of these media sizes Negative Print Negative Print allows you to produce an image with black and white reversed fig 4 10 This type of image is used in offset printing Set Negative Print from your application Print dialog box To ensure the highest quality when producing negative images use this menu in the Print dialog box rather than an application setting True enables this feature and False disables it CIOVAHVA AVITADAY YOOJOMHTT OATDAMI e2nonlsH geit 18910 11A oni bos WilsuQ 1oiroque eovitieod bas esviisgoV 92iv5G 900 mort Fig 4 10 Negative Print Negative Enhanced Imaging Technology NEIT Traditionally laser printers were designed to print positive images XANTE s innovative patented optional Negative Enhanced Imaging Technology NEIT is the first technology to address the problems
103. OM 1 7 Web page 8 22 XANT technology AccelaFont 2 42 Enhanced Screen G 3 Font Accelerator G 4 More X ACT 2 50 NEIT 1 5 G 6 X ACT 2 50 G 11 XANT Utilities 1 5 XANT Utilities Macintosh Downloader 2 34 2 35 PS Files folder 2 36 XANT Utilities PC PDFs folder 3 41 PS Files folder 3 42 XANT web access 2 69 Help 2 69 Register printer 2 69 Web site 2 69 XANT web site 2 70 2 74 XTScreen menu 4 21 Z Zone name EtherTalk 2 2 000 Index l 17 l 18 Index
104. PostScript Features AccelaFont DPI Linearization LPI Margins More X ACTI and VM ivccisicissziesdonseovavevatecsdentedsbeinsdnatconsedbereradaiasecsatedsbeteseatec 3 48 Print Quality EP1 Fuser Temperature NEIT and Print Density 3 57 Reset Factory DEraUltS cuset eee eeen ee eea ee eE EE ESEA 3 60 Storage Devices Hard Disk and RAM Disk sseseseseseseesesssssesssssssrersseses 3 61 Trays and Media Input Trays and Media Types 3 63 Printer TROT TO eee EE Rx Bn Dd Dresdehiees aaia 3 64 Diagnostic Bformabl OB eosam ea RDAD URSUS RERO SUUM UR UR ON M REN 3 65 General Tailor X M DOT poppe tri pei ERE ERE Doe EE EE ARR 3 65 VO and T 3 66 li ANSP MOTAS e M 3 68 Printer Vip inti npe usu T 3 69 Printer Sey o enc T DD DD nena DD D DD E 3 70 Dots DOPSOUE S qu eee EEEE EEEE IPAE REA NUR PER SRS RD N 3 70 Set ASG or MM 3 71 Change eser the Pass WONG oss ies bor RNUQK NUR UNS URN M ERO FN Eta LLENO 3 72 IUE PASOS onset Den taten nt etidicebel To atime tion DesU ND EON TRE EON RE 3 72 XANT Web Access XANT Web Site Register Printer and Help 3 73 Using the Advanced Graphics Center Feature Access esses 3 74 linearize T 3 75 More Ae es ELEC C m 3 80 Managing doro c P 3 83 Chapter 4 ConBsgtatl fio o sepasr
105. Print Density in chapter 4 for details 1 Remove all media from the output tray Then squeeze the top cover latch to release the lock fig 1 7 Fig 1 7 Release Top Cover Latch Fig 1 8 Open Top Cover and Multipurpose Feeder 2 Lift the top cover The multipurpose feeder opens automatically as you open the top cover fig 1 8 Introduction and Installation 1 9 A A Ay A Do not touch any parts inside the printer 3 Remove the toner cartridge if it is in the printer by grasping its handles and pulling it slowly out of the printer fig 1 9 Once you begin pulling the cartridge out of the printer remove it completely The cartridge s shutter may not open properly or be damaged if the cartridge is pulled partially out and then pushed back in the printer Fig 1 9 Remove Toner Cartridge Fig 1 10 Shake Toner Cartridge 4 Remove the new toner cartridge from its package Then gently shake the cartridge several times to distribute toner evenly fig 1 10 Shake the cartridge enough to free any compacted toner Using the printer with toner still compacted may damage the cartridge 5 Place the toner cartridge on a flat surface then grasp the sealing tape s end tab and pull the tape straight out fig 1 11 If the tape is pulled out at an angle it may break off inside the cartridge Fig 1 11 Remove Sealing Tape Fig 1 12 Insert Pins into Guide Channels 1 10 Introduction and I
106. Remove Media Jam from Cassette Fig 8 9 Remove Media Jam from Paper Feeder 7 Remove any jammed media from inside the paper feeder fig 8 9 Clearing a Back of Paper Feeder Jam 1 Open the feeder s back cover by grasping the notch on the top side of the cover and pulling down fig 8 10 A The cover may be held in place by two strong springs or by magnets If so hold it open with one hand to avoid pinching your fingers Fig 8 10 Open Back Cover Fig 8 11 Remove Media Jam from Back of Paper Feeder 2 Remove any jammed media from the back of the paper feeder fig 8 11 6 16 Troubleshooting 3 Close the feeder s back cover fig 8 12 Fig 8 12 Close Back Cover Clearing a Toner Cartridge Area Jam The inside of the printer becomes very hot during operation Do not touch any area with a high temperature warning label fig 8 13 without first turning off the printer and allowing it to cool for at least 40 minutes PI When the printer is turned off all print job information still in memory is lost the A Jam Recover feature cannot print the last page processed P pagep Fig 8 13 High Temperature Warning Fig 8 14 Remove Toner Cartridge 1 Remove the toner cartridge from the printer by grasping it by the handles on the top and pulling it slowly out of the printer fig 8 14 A Once you begin pulling
107. S op cchcveusccivasassusnesxaracpauespiswsievascelsssssiowsiabasessbalspupunedssapienns 3 21 Configuring Your Printer s IP Subnet and Gateway Addresses 3 25 Reconfiguring the PPD after Adding Options 1s dein rh bt tu rib ta rhetores 3 28 Configuring a Remote Printer Running in LPR Mode e eene 3 30 Creating NDPS Printers at the Server Consoles sies nee torrente phus 3 31 Using the Remote Printer LPR TCPIP Option from the Server Console3 32 Jnstallins Ausilidty IES siessen ann 3 32 Adobe Acrobat Reader saienisi E 3 32 Adobe Tvpe Manager ATM cavchcudiusuieroiusnscvsdusnpupndueniapedaonsusnmianpawnipwnssnwnsenbiens 3 34 MAN TE Advanced Graphics Center schscatuictadntatuhebedntatutesednladssebedatasabebedscabesebbs 3 37 View DV ANIA ANS bs etna Bas erase eeii a E AE E E aE 3 39 Resse HIDE EEA E E E bU EE A EA 3 40 Miscellaneous ProceduteSrennnenonninenoinirenonini i onn n na n 3 41 CD ROM PostScript Files Feature Access seseseseseseseesesesesesesesesrsrsrsreressssse 3 41 IE du irsana aTe ae e E e e Eaa e 3 41 PS Piles Polde a a a a a 3 42 Usine the Browser Feature ACCESS x ssisicaticisisatiniaisadivagicstizanisitecsabeldiesalsstieinale 3 43 Printer Home Pao uoce eie quspu don t po na nE R RR e beaten 3 43 Printer TUE UIE AAT iesse e DEN SONS EE EE 3 44 Informational Pages Start Page Low Toner Page and Network Page 3 45 Network EtherTalk General and TCP IP Configuration 3 45
108. Screening and Dot Shape 4 21 Star DELI eM E 4 22 Tonei Ge Tl CONTO a debes e E E E OP DR NN 4 22 Redistributine TOP capo ee eee SERO RERO ONU DONA UE DUO DR REN EUN 4 22 Adinstne PERDE Leuten eee eeen aA DIS R b pris prb pri o Eripe Piu 4 22 Toner Page uisaute tu idu pi dup In I n uM Nu ML dd U IUE LI INIM ui SML Id D IU MI DU MMIE Mui M E du 4 23 Tray Sect CODE OS aeren eeg ea e AEE EE E R E 4 23 Selectine a Specifi Trays enega E DR EUER N INR 4 24 Enabling Tray Chaining Tray Switching seessssssssssssssssssssererereseseseseseses 4 24 Virtaal Memor D UD iaae E EE E E E 4 25 BIOS 4 25 Chapter 5 Media Selecting Handling and Printing 5 1 livi wo also o ON MN 5 1 Media SpeciNcatonS conati e rodar EXE OE E DELL Eiei 5 1 Guidelines for Selecting and Storing Media 1 rant rtt rtn antena 5 1 D DM Me 5 2 TV ANA T cesi dando bib EEE IDA PONO 5 2 Printing on Custom Sized Media used ed quieto pet pv e pd edid 5 3 Media TYPE rc 5 3 Media nits e QNOD E E ERRER AA E E E UR CDU DUANE ais 5 4 Media PMN seassa ee ences Dota taste eae E AE AE EE AE E 5 4 Media SourceS endean eree E a aida ute uo E Quali eia uM 5 4 Optional Baper PEcder See eee EEEE E E E EEEE 5 5 Paper Cassettes m 5 5 Multipurpose BEECES Pus aubceidboddbbpidietdedur
109. Start Run Then browse to the XANT Utilities CD ROM select XInstall xt_prinst exe in the root directory and click OK The XANT Utilities Main window appears fig 3 62 3 32 PC Setup Fig 3 62 XANTE Utilities Main Menu Fig 3 63 Select Utility Window 2 Select Software Utilities The Select Utility window appears 3 63 3 Select Adobe Acrobat Reader then click OK A Question window appears fig 3 64 asking about uninstalling versions of Acrobat Reader g JE Tar a Fig 3 64 Question Window Fig 3 65 Reader Welcome Window 4 Click Yes in the Question Window fig 3 64 The Reader Welcome window appears fig 3 65 PC Setup 3 33 1 EE A Lean cul mca Fannie E om tm inlra ibn Ti itd in Bl sh Hind iin tas leon und uadit nan rum sar ober rri om raa Wonder 8 D by rh Loren LL Fig 3 66 Destination Folder Window 5 Read the Reader Welcome window then click Next The Destination Folder window appears fig 3 66 6 Select the folder in which to install Acrobat Reader Then click Next When the information Thank You window appears click OK The Main Menu reappears 7 Click Exit when the XANTE Utilities Main window reappears Adobe Type Manager ATM 1l Insert the XANTE Utilities CD ROM into your PC XANT Utilities Installer should launch automatically If not select Start Run Then browse to the XANT Utilities CD ROM select XInstall xt_prinst exe in the root directory and
110. T Utilities CD ROM into your Macintosh The Main Installation window should open automatically fig 2 47 If not double click the CD ROM icon then double click the Setup icon PRS end ie Masta Nj Sa par M um Fig 2 47 Main Installation Window Fig 2 48 Utilities Menu 2 Select Adobe Acrobat Reader fig 2 47 from the Software Utilities drop down menu or select Adobe Acrobat Reader from the Utilities menu fig 2 48 The Acrobat Reader window appears fig 2 49 MH ee ee Le a a ee E Fes Ma i Ded ee mE eed raihi ee Adobe Acrobat Reader 50 E ess eee I ae LLL LA LL d ccn MN um E E am mc mc E ee cor ap Lum ioe Fig 2 49 Acrobat Reader Window Fig 2 50 Acrobat Reader Installer Window 3 Click Continue fig 2 49 The Acrobat Reader Installer window appears fig 2 50 4 Select the desired type of installation from the top left drop down menu fig 2 50 Easy Install installs all necessary files automatically Custom Install allows you to select which files to install including Asian language files 5 Click Install fig 2 50 The Installing Progress window appears fig 2 51 2 24 Macintosh Setup Wi If you are online a caution window appears which allows you to quit Netscape N Navigator and Internet Explorer if they are running fig 2 51 In this case click Quit Applications NOTE There s more To A than Reader SE en Wer Enlever do BER ed ge EH
111. The factory default is 4 1 Goto the printer home page fig 2 116 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 2 116 Printer Home Page Fig 2 117 Print Density Window Macintosh Setup 2 55 2 Select Printer Configuration Print Quality Print Density fig 2 116 The Print Density window appears fig 2 117 3 Select the density level for your printer in increments of one Then select Change 4 Close the browser Reset Factory Defaults Reset Factory defaults allows you to reset the printer name and EtherTalk Zone to enable startup page and low toner page printing to enable DHCP and to reset PostScript margins to factory default settings Wi If you select reset to factory default enabling DHCP could affect your IP address A 1 Goto the printer home page fig 2 118 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 2 118 Printer Home Page Fig 2 119 Reset Factory Defaults Window 2 Select Printer Configuration Reset Factory Defaults fig 2 118 The Print Reset Factory Defaults window appears fig 2 119 3 Click Reset Factory Defaults Your printer will restart and the changes will be in effect Factory defaults also may be reset using the printer s front panel keys See Resetting to Factory Defaults in chapter 4 for details g Storage Devices Hard Disk and RAM Disk Storage Devices allows you to display current hard disk and RAM disk settings and
112. This section describes available printer features and their configuration Accurate Calibration Technology X ACT X ACT XANT s patented Accurate Calibration Technology allows you to calibrate your printer line lengths as well as correct inaccuracies in printing width height skew and angle X ACT is part of your printer s Graphic Software package You can use the front pane Graphic Xact menu or the browser More X ACT feature This section cover front panel calibration see PostScript Features AccelaFont DPI Linearization LPI Margins More X ACT and VM in chapter 2 Macintosh or 3 PC for details on the browser procedure Because of manufacturing variations and usage a printer may not print lines with the exact dimensions specified by the application X ACT allows you to calibrate your printer to compensate for these differences Front Panel X ACT Your printer s front panel Graphic Xact menu allows you to make 1 2 mm line length adjustments using the following procedure RC To use the front panel XACT you need a metric ruler with 1 2 millimeter rule N markings Also you must use the paper cassette not the multipurpose feeder when making X ACT adjustments The adjustments for one size media apply to every media size so you do not have to make individual adjustments for each size NOTE Configuration 4 9 1 Make sure the printer is on and idle Then make sure that media the size of your final output is
113. This eliminates time usually required to access fonts from the hard disk AccelaFont is active only if fonts are downloaded to an optional hard disk on the printer and RAM Disk is enabled for 1 MB or more You also can set this feature using the front panel Utility Font Accel configuration menu Options are 1 Go to the printer home page fig 3 101 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details 3 48 PC Setup Fig 3 101 Printer Home Page Fig 3 102 AccelaFont Window 2 Select Printer Configuration PostScript AccelaFont fig 3 101 The AccelaFont window appears fig 3 102 3 Select the desired percent of RAM Disk to allocate for AccelaFont from the Percentage drop down menu fig 3 102 Options are 096 to 10096 the factory default in 1096 increments 4 Click Change 5 Close your browser DPI Default Setting The DPI option allows you to set the default Dots Per Inch dpi on your printer 1 Goto the printer home page fig 3 103 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 3 103 Printer Home Page Fig 3 104 Default DP Window 2 Select Printer Configuration PostScript DPI fig 3 103 The Default DPI window appears fig 3 104 PC Setup 3 49 3 Select the desired resolution for your printer from the drop down menu fig 3 104 Options go from 600 x 600 dpi 1200 x 1200 dpi and 2400 x 2400 dpi the factory default is 2400 x 2400 dpi Then click Cha
114. XANTE TiimMaker 110 220 volt edition XANTE CORPORATION 2800 Dauphin St Suite 100 Mobile AL 36606 2400 P O Box 16526 Mobile AL 36616 0526 Phone 800 926 8393 251 473 6502 Fax 251 473 6503 Web Site www xante com FilmMaker 4 v4 6 16 03 Trademarks XANT Accel a Writer and ScreenWriter are registered trademarks and X ACT and FilmStar are trademarks of XANT CORPORATION Adobe Adobe Illustrator Adobe PageMaker Adobe Photoshop Adobe PostScript Acrobat Minion Adobe Type Manager ATM Aldus and the ATM and PostScript logos are registered trademarks and Adobe Acrobat Reader AdobePS and Adobe PostScript 3 are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated which may be registered in certain jurisdictions Apple AppleTalk ColorSync EtherTalk LaserWriter AppleShare Mac OS Mac Power Macintosh QuickDraw QuickTime TrueType and Macintosh are registered trademarks and LocalTalk Balloon Help and SimpleText are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc Akzidenz Grotesk is a registered trademark of Berthold Types Limited Corporation DEC is a registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation InstallShield is a registered trademark of InstallShield Software Corporation Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation ITC Bookman is a registered trademark of International Typeface Corporation registered in the
115. a meets the requirements in Media Specifications in chapter 5 If necessary replace the media See Standard Cassette and Multipurpose Feeder in chapter 1 The fuser may not be working properly The printer displays the E FUSER status message if there is a hardware problem with the fuser Instead of my image or text the output is a blank page The sealing tape may not be pulled out of the toner cartridge Remove the cartridge and pull out the tape See Toner Cartridge in chapter 1 The printer may feed two or more sheets of media at a time Reduce the size of the media stack See Standard Cassette and Multipurpose Feeder in chapter 1 The density setting may need adjusting See Adjusting Print Density in chapter 4 The toner cartridge may need replacing See Toner Cartridge in chapter 1 Instead of my image or text the output is a solid black page The density setting may need adjusting See Adjusting Print Density in chapter 4 The toner cartridge may need replacing See Toner Cartridge in chapter 1 Troubleshooting 8 7 Blank areas appear in my image or text Pri D inter a aaber Printer Media may be damp or otherwise damaged Make sure the media meets the requirements in Media Specifications in chapter 5 If necessary replace the media See Standard Cassette and Multipurpose Feeder in chapter 1 The sealing tape may
116. a stack is fewer than approximately 25 pages Toner in the cartridge is low or needs to be redistributed The toner cartridge is either not in the printer or not seated in place The printer is off line It cannot receive or process data A media jam has occurred along the paper path No media is in the selected cassette the selected cassette or feeder is not properly installed or tray chaining is selected and all trays do not contain the same size media The printer is processing a job to print Font Accelerator is updating the RAM disk at runtime with the most recently used fonts The printer is on line and ready to accept a print job The printer is completing a print job and ready to accept a new job to begin processing The printer has reset to factory default settings and the On Line and Tray Select keys can be released safely The printer is resetting after the Reset key has been pressed and an active job has been cancelled The printer is printing a test page WAITING The printer is processing a job and waiting to receive more data before printing WARMING UP The printer is warming up Power and Setup Issues This section provides tips for resolving problems concerning power to the printer and host or concerning printer setup My printer has no power Make sure the power cord is plugged into the printer and the power source See Connecting the Power Cord in chapter 1 Make sure the printer is tur
117. a weight 2 21 3 14 4 17 Mirror print 2 21 3 14 4 9 4 17 Multipurpose feeder media size 4 17 Negative print 4 9 4 18 Paper size selection 4 19 Power save 4 19 Printer timeout 4 19 RAM disk 4 20 Resolution 4 9 4 20 Smooth shading 2 22 3 16 4 9 4 20 Soft error 4 21 Spot function 4 21 Start up page 4 22 Toner cartridge control 4 22 Toner page 4 23 Tray chaining 4 24 Tray selection 4 23 Tray switch 4 9 X ACT 4 9 FIFO G 3 File menu Download Fonts 2 35 Download PostScript file 2 35 File server G 3 Film 5 3 Bleeds 8 10 Distortions 8 10 FilmStar 2 G 3 Ordering 5 8 Scratches 8 10 Sizes 5 8 Small type plugs 8 11 Troubleshooting 8 10 FilmStar 2 G 3 Film scratches 8 10 Image bleeds 8 10 Image distorts 8 10 Light output 8 11 Small type plugs 8 11 Troubleshooting 8 10 FilmStar 2 solution 8 10 8 11 Fire hazard 8 14 Firmware revision 2 61 3 65 Firmware upgrades 7 14 Font G 3 Font Accel menu 4 12 Font Accelerator 1 5 4 12 G 4 RAM disk 4 20 Fontlist page 2 68 3 72 4 25 Font sample page 2 68 3 72 4 25 Fonts 1 4 Adobe PostScript 6 7 Adobe PostScript 3 3 42 Downloaded G 2 Downloading 2 70 2 71 Managing 2 70 3 83 Index 1 5 Managing PC 3 83 PC 3 83 PostScript 2 30 Removing Macintosh 2 72 Removing PC 3 83 Resident fonts list 2 36 Resident fonts samples 2 36 Reviewing Macintosh 2 72 Sample page 2 68 3 72 TrueType 2 30 Typel 2 30 Fonts ps 2 36 2 72 3 42 Fontsamp ps 2 36 2 72 3 42 Form Feed key 4 2
118. able Options Optional Tray drop down menu Then click OK The Printers and Faxes window reappears fig 3 59 Close the Printers Windows 98 Me fig 3 58 or Printers and Faxes Windows XP 2000 NT fig 3 60 window Now the PPD is configured for the new tray the tray will be available through your applications Configuring a Remote Printer Running in LPR Mode Ky Before using this procedure TCP IP should already be loaded and configured on your YA NetWare server If not consult your NetWare documentation for instructions L 2 Select Create from the Object menu The New Object dialog box appears Select NDPS printer The Create NDPS printer dialog box opens Type the name that you want in the Printer Name field Select Create a New Printer at the Printer Agent Source Field then click Create Confirm the Printer Agent name which will default to the printer that your are defining and browse to select the NDPS Manager that you want assigned to it Select the Novell gateway at the Gateway Types Window The configure Novell PDS dialog box appears Configure the Novell PDS by selecting the Printer Type and Port Type then click OK Configure the connection type as Remote LPR TCPIP and specify the port type as LPT COM or Other then click Next Select the printer driver for each client operating system The drivers selected here automatically will download to your W S when you install this printer 3 30 PC Setup
119. ade in this procedure as the defaults for all print jobs select b Save Custom Setting from the Print window drop down menu NOTE 9 Click Print The OS X Installer Log prints verifying that your printer is installed correctly Adobe PostScript Printer Driver and Printer PPD Installation OS 9 The XANT Utilities CD ROM contains the latest AdobePS Printer driver and your printer s PPD These files must be installed before you use your printer They are loaded onto your system during the Install Printer process This section covers that process as well as manual installation in case you should need to reinstall them Macintosh Setup 2 11 Install Printer Use Install Printer to install XANTE Utilities your printer s PPD and your printer s QuarkXPress PDF if QuarkXPress is on your system 1l Insert the XANTE Utilities CD ROM into your Macintosh The Main Installation window should open automatically fig 2 25 If not double click the CD ROM icon then double click the Setup icon Fig 2 25 Main Installation Window Fig 2 26 XANTE Utilities Window 2 Select the desired language from the drop down menu fig 2 25 then select your printer from the Install Printer drop down menu fig 2 26 The Driver Installer window for the selected printer appears fig 2 27 Fig 2 27 Driver Installer Window Fig 2 28 Read Me Window 3 Click Continue fig 2 27 The Read Me window appears fig 2 28 4 Read the
120. ain Menu Fig 3 28 Select Utility Window 2 Highlight XANT Window 95 98 ME LPR Tool fig 3 28 then click OK XANT Window 95 98 ME LPR Tool launches then the Xant LPR Setup window appears fig 3 29 PC Setup 3 17 Fig 3 29 XantELPR Setup Window Fig 3 30 License Agreement Window 3 pg eem ma eg ient pn je d LII ELLE i oen miis umm cum ima gems pee uw ee aj Ba aus cma a im Lowen daemon i mimmi ap oa mg ha ol oe alu eae sp Es Te i Read the Setup window fig 3 29 then click Next The Xant LPR License Agreement window appears fig 3 30 Read it carefully and click Yes The Destination Location window appears fig 3 31 Daa Become p ame Ere ee ee patis ieee cai d n ea ira rmi ammi PE rim lem iim ira aki emm oe SJ bre cd pr mmm ihr din prp ln rukdus ia iain iri Rum mma cdm dg Gu psu und aan omes He Fare a m Mura moss Primo near Dd Aga i ber mer _ i Fig 3 31 Destination Location Window Fig 3 32 Select Program Folder Window 4 Select the folder s into which Setup will install the files fig 3 31 then click Next The Select Program Folder window appears fig 3 32 5 Select the folder s to which you want the program icons added fig 3 32 then click Next The Setup Complete window appears fig 3 33 then click Finish A ReadMe file window appears 3 18 PC Setup Fig 3 33 Setup Complet
121. amples of the Adobe PostScript fonts resident on your printer Low Toner Prints a toner reorder page See Informational Pages Start Page Low Toner Page and Network Page in chapter 2 Start Page Prints a printer start up page See Informational Pages Start Page Low Toner Page and Network Page in chapter 2 Configuration 4 25 Verify Prints a verification page for calibration during linearization Menu Layout Prints a page listing the front panel menus and their current settings 000 4 26 Configuration Chapter 5 Media Selecting Handling and Printing Introduction This chapter covers selecting handling and printing on various media types and sizes Media Specifications To ensure your job prints correctly always use appropriate media Store and handle it carefully to prevent damage to the media and printer This section provides guidelines for selecting media and describes media types and sizes for your printer Guidelines for Selecting and Storing Media To prevent media jams and print quality problems when selecting media for your printer use media that can withstand a temperature of 302 F 150 C F A Preprinted inks such as letterheads that cannot withstand these temperatures can N damage the printer s fusing rollers permanently NOTE meets weight and media type requirements for the media source See Loading Media later in this chapter Do not use media that
122. and installation for those that are user installable Printer Options You can order controller board upgrades and paper handling options to enhance your printer s performance The following chart lists options and their types of installation Option Type of Installation 2400 DPI Resolution Factory or user Internal IDE hard disk Factory or user NEIT Factory or user Paper feeder User only RAM upgrades Factory or user Factory installable options ordered with your printer are installed before the printer is shipped To order options call XANTE at 800 926 8839 US and Canada from 7 00 a m until 6 00 p m Central Standard Time Monday through Friday or call your XANTE vendor If it is a factory upgrade you will be given an RMA Return Material Authorization number and shipping instructions Paper Handling Options You can add up to two optional paper cassette feeders to your printer to increase input capacity for standard paper to approximately 1 650 sheets Paper Cassette Feeder This section describes installing and removing a paper cassette feeder Cassette feeders support the same paper cassettes as the printer s built in paper feeder See Standard Cassette in chapter 1 and Media Sources in chapter 5 Installing the Paper Cassette Feeder 1 Unpack the paper cassette feeder from the shipping carton Remove all plastic tape and stabilizing material Save the carton and packing material to use for storing the feeder
123. ansparencies excessively to prevent fingerprints and scratches Keep the paper path clean see chapter 6 dust or dirt can scratch transparencies and reduce print quality Load fewer transparencies if jams occur The weight of a stack of transparencies could cause the sheets to stick together Remove each transparency as it is printed to help prevent static buildup Do not fan transparencies This causes static buildup which can cause jams Use the Cool fuser temperature setting when printing transparencies 000 5 10 Media Selecting Handling and Printing Chapter 6 Maintenance and Specifications Introduction Your FilmMaker 4 printer requires minimal maintenance This chapter describes how to handle store move and clean your printer and contains technical specifications and warranty information Maintenance Proper care will extend the printer s life Use the guidelines in this section to maintain your printer in optimum working condition and to ensure the highest quality output Handling the Printer Use the following guidelines when handling or using your printer The printer weighs approximately 58 5 Ib 26 5 kg without the toner cassettes and o media installed Always have two people lift the printer using the recessed grip areas on the right and left sides At the end of the day turn off the printer following the procedure in chapter 1 Never move the printer with the toner cartridge installed Do not place an
124. anual 2 30 Margin settings 2 61 3 65 Media types 2 59 Media weights 5 3 Memory 6 8 Moving 1 8 6 2 Package 1 6 Page count 2 61 3 65 Ports 4 15 PostScript version 2 61 3 65 PPD 4 4 PPD Macintosh 2 18 Print density dial 4 22 Processor 1 4 RAM size 2 61 3 65 Register online 2 32 Registration form 2 33 Reset factory defaults 4 4 Resolution 4 20 Security 2 66 3 70 Setup 4 3 4 4 4 9 Start up page Macintosh 2 37 Starting 1 16 Status 4 1 Status messages 8 1 Storing 6 1 System parameters Macintosh 2 37 System parameters PC 3 43 Technical specifications 6 7 Weight 6 1 6 2 6 7 Weight warning 7 3 1 12 Index Printer configuration Browser 3 44 I O configuration 3 45 Network configuration 2 39 Options 2 19 Options PPD 2 19 Printer control language G 8 Printer drivers G 8 Deleting 3 3 Macintosh 2 11 PC 3 41 Printer font directory 2 35 Printer home page 2 37 3 43 Printer Information Diagnostic 2 60 General 2 60 I O settings 2 60 Options 2 60 Printer information 2 60 Printer maintenance 2 65 3 69 Printer margin G 8 Printer margins 2 47 Printer options Configuring 3 12 Printer status 2 35 Printing Double sided copy 5 7 Envelopes 5 9 Labels 5 9 System Parameters Macintosh 2 37 System Parameters PC 3 43 Tips envelopes 5 9 Tips labels 5 9 Tips transparencies 5 10 Transparencies 5 10 PrintMonitor Add paper prompt 1 15 Prnipsub ps 2 37 3 43 Processing status message 8 2 Processor 1 4
125. ap tape and shipping stabilizers from all of the items Your printer package contains the following items Your XANTE printer e 500 sheet cassette Power cord e Quick Reference manual XANT Utilities CD ROM Toner cartridge Additional paper cassettes and feeders are packed separately RAM internal hard disk and resolution upgrades ordered with your printer are installed at the factory before shipping If you do not receive your full shipment or if anything is damaged call XANT Customer Support at 800 926 8393 US and Canada or your XANT vendor Introduction and Installation 1 7 Printer Overview Use Figures 1 4 1 5 and 1 6 to become familiar with your new printer Front Panel Paper Stop Output Tray Fuser Cover prOutput Tray Extension Top Cover Top Cover Latch Paper Cassette Fig 1 4 Front View of Printer Multipurpose Feeder Open Extentsion Paper Cassette Fig 1 6 Inside Front View of Printer Toner Cartridge Duplexer Replacement Cover Output Tray Fuser Cover Vent Parallel Port USB Port Duplexer Port power Cord Receptacle Fig 1 5 Rear View of Printer The printer s toner cartridge combines the toner and drum This cartridge can print approximately 7 000 sheets of letter A4 size pages at 5 coverage Quality and reliability of refilled toner cartridges vary XANTE recommends not using them Printer damage caused by these products is not cover
126. ars 3 Make sure your printer is selected in the Printer drop down menu then click General to display the list of options fig 4 2 Preven Your AT Fide Siam fewer eT ies Fmemr a Weriinrksl bs ama THER imo j e napa ur levwigemws eee tees r Fig 4 2 Adobe Options Menu Fig 4 3 Printer Specific Options Menu 4 Choose Printer Specific Options The printer option menus appear fig 4 3 5 Use the right scroll bar to locate the option then use the option s drop down menu to select its setting Repeat to configure other printer options 6 Click Save Settings to save the Print dialog box settings as the defaults for all jobs sent to the selected printer 7 Click Print to send the file to the printer Selecting PPD Options Windows 98 and Me To configure a printer feature from the Print dialog box 1 Install and configure the AdobePS printer driver and your printer s PPD following the instructions in chapter 3 Configuration 4 5 2 Choose File Print The Print dialog box appears Fig 4 4 Windows 98 and Me Print Dialog Box 3 Make sure your printer is selected in the Name box fig 4 4 then click Properties The Properties window appears 4 Click the Graphics tab to set the Resolution option 5 Click the Device Options tab to set other printer options Fig 4 5 Windows 98 and Me Device Options Tab a Use the right scroll bar to locate the feature in th
127. as been made to ensure that this manual is free of inaccuracies and omissions However XANT CORPORATION makes no warranty of any kind including but not limited to any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose with regard to this manual XANTE CORPORATION assumes no responsibility for or liability for errors contained in this manual or for incidental special or consequential damages arising out of the furnishing of this manual or the use of this manual in operating the equipment or in connection with the performance of the equipment when so operated Proprietary The digitally encoded software included with the XANTE FilmMaker 4 printer is copyrighted 1998 2003 by XANTE CORPORATION All Rights Reserved Patent Pending This software may not be reproduced modified displayed transferred or copied in any form or manner or on any media without the express written permission of XANTE CORPORATION Copyright This manual is Copyrighted 1998 2003 by XANTE CORPORATION All Rights Reserved Printed in the USA This manual may not be copied in whole or in part nor transferred to any other media or language without the express written permission of XANTE CORPORATION Safety Information The printer generates a small amount of ozone gas during image transfer in the printing process When shipped from the factory the printer meets the Underwriter s Laboratory UL standard for ozone emission An inv
128. ate a hard disk with a controller board XANTE printers can be configured with internal IDE hard disks IEEE Institute of Electronic and Electrical Engineers An organization active in creation of electrical communication and networking standards in the United States Imageable Area The area on a page that the printer can access for printing For example on many XANT printers an 11 00 x 17 00 279 mm x 431 mm page has an imageable area of 10 82 x 16 85 275 mm x 428 mm Imagesetter High resolution large format device for producing film from electronically generated page layouts Impression Product resulting from one cycle of the printing machine Interface Cable A cable that physically connects two computer devices so that they can communicate Landscape Orientation A page format that is larger horizontally than it is vertically The term comes from painting when artists paint landscapes across the wide dimension of the canvas See also Portrait Orientation Levels of Gray The number of shades tonal changes of gray in a halftone image The number depends on the line screen and printing resolution used The higher the number the smoother the image looks during the transition of dot sizes See also Grayscale and Line Screen Line Screen The screen frequency or the number of rows of halftone dots in an inch The line screen and printing resolution determine the levels of gray produced in an image The line scre
129. auaescanseaesaneugeransemaranceienranceuss 3 3 Adobe Driyer sree e A E EEE 3 4 Installing AdobePS Printer Driver and Printer PPD ssessesseseeesreresesrerrsesrerrsesrerese 3 4 Windows 98 Mes ies testes tete berie E tet levis eee beris eve Ovi bO goes 3 4 Jua A Tne VENES NNI IRR crm 3 4 Parallel Connection Installation ices adndcdutudocadsdednaubstetncndodedosututudndecudubusesondwbubuta 3 7 OM SUFI he BPI sses eiee E Ee aee EE E E E 3 10 COMMS UCTS Printer Opon S S v aeu rnae e ee 3 12 Past Imaging RP P 3 13 Gamma seseris eien a si adu Duci lu n a a n ud duin d esini 3 13 Media Welo DE A 3 14 Miror FUG grn nane ANAE ANAA A A cetuade 3 14 Optimized CE BROT anaratas ee e e e aea FI 3 15 Sereen ul S D oso E AAEE A E AR AA AAA A 3 15 Screen Shape Ubri ea aeee AEAEE EE EEEE 3 16 Smooth Shading co dated e HORE PR EE a lu EEEE 3 16 Additional Printer Specific Options for Adobe PageMaker 3 16 TraySwitch Tray Chaining sette iab Hubbud sedie d MEI HE ecd 3 16 MgC MEmOT Y uoassiur pnpstake pup eui pna np ndr Qu ON 3 17 ODO T ottenere o dti psid ue aE 3 17 XANT Win95 98 Me LPR Tool sscsscsssssssssscessssssssscnscssesssssssensescessnssnseeees 3 17 Configuring Your Printer s IP Subnet and Gateway Addresses 3 19 Installing AdobePS Printer Driver and Printer PPD siicsccoscencsattsetenrascatocssnsetecses 3 21 Woadows NT SDUD Pe raer a e dnd e Gay E 3 21 pigeat ANT
130. ccess the secure webpage areas When you are through using the browser select Printer Security Logout fig 2 148 The Logout window appears fig 2 150 2 66 Macintosh Setup Fig 2 150 Logout Window 5 Click Submit When a message appears that you are now logged out close the browser Set Password Set Password allows you to set your printer s password to access the secure webpage area 1 Goto the printer home page fig 2 151 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 2 151 Printer Home Page 2 Select Printer Security Set Password fig 2 151 A Set Password windows appears fig 2 152 or fig 2 153 Fig 2 152 Set Password Window 1 Fig 2 153 Set Password Window 2 If you do not have a password When figure 2 152 appears skip to step 3 Macintosh Setup 2 67 If you have a password When figure 2 153 appears enter your password in the Current Password field and then continue to step 3 3 Type ina password of your choice up to 8 characters in length in the New Password field fig 2 152 or fig 2 153 then reenter that new password in the Re enter Password field 4 Click submit you now can access the secure webpage areas When you are through select Printer Security Logout fig 2 151 The Logout window appears fig 2 150 5 Click Submit Then close the browser This new password will be required every time you log on to your printer s web page
131. ce that contains the paper size you selected in the file Other options Cassette Upper Optional Tray Lower Optional Tray and Manual feed direct the printer to use a specific tray Optional tray selections are valid only if these trays are installed Enabling Tray Chaining Tray Switching Use the Utility Tray Switching configuration menu or your Print dialog box options to enable tray chaining Your printer allows you to chain to all paper cassettes and the multipurpose feeder if the following conditions are met All selected media sources must contain the same size media If the printer detects a different size media when it switches to a new tray a Paper Out message appears All trays must be inserted properly When tray chaining is enabled an incorrectly positioned tray prevents the printer from printing Use the Utility Tray Switching configuration menu to change the printer s default tray chaining option Normal enables tray chaining to all installed paper cassettes Manual Feed enables tray chaining to all installed paper cassettes and the multipurpose feeder Off the factory default disables chaining 4 24 Configuration The Tray Switch menu in the Print dialog box of Windows 98 and Me as well as some Macintosh applications allow you to override printer default setting for jobs sent to the printer from your system True enables tray chaining to all cassettes and the multipurpose feeder False disables chaining Most
132. chapter for details Fig 2 87 Printer Home Page Fig 2 88 EtherTalk Configuration Window 2 Select Printer Configuration Network EtherTalk fig 2 87 The EtherTalk Configuration window appears fig 2 88 3 Enter the desired name for the printer fig 2 88 for example you might name the printer Samson Then click Change to the right 4 Enter the new name for the EtherTalk Zone Name fig 2 88 Then click Change to the right US EtherTalk zone names are limited to 32 characters are not case sensitive and cannot 6 AN o include the equal approximately equal asterisk colon or at characters 5 Close your browser General Network Configuration General configuration options allow you to set the network buffers l Go to the printer home page fig 2 89 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details 2 40 Macintosh Setup Fig 2 89 Printer Home Page Fig 2 90 General Network Configuration Window 2 Select Printer Configuration Network General fig 2 89 The General Network Configuration window appears fig 2 90 3 Select the desired size for network buffers then click Change 4 Close your browser then restart your printer to make the new size setting take effect TCP IP Configuration TCP IP configuration includes the class IP address subnet mask and DHCP options Ky Your printer s default TCP IP address should be changed to ag
133. ck the CD ROM icon then double click the Setup icon za i pa he m Beet Seber Geet DE Eime ie GE nepeeri nas Fig 2 76 Main Installation Window Fig 2 77 Web Menu 2 32 Macintosh Setup 2 Select one of the following three options Register Online fig 2 76 Register Your Printer from the Web Information drop down menu fig 2 76 or Register Your Printer from the Web menu fig 2 77 Your web browser launches and takes you to the product registration page on XANT s web site fig 2 78 Fig 2 78 Registration Form 3 Complete and submit the registration form fig 2 78 Then close your web browser When the Main Installation window appears fig 2 76 close it id You also can register online using your browser See XANTE Web Access XANT 4 Web Site Register Printer and Help later in this chapter Access XANTE Online Support You can use the printer utilities to access XANT s online support web site which offers quick access to printer drivers frequently asked questions download files etc Access this site via the Web menu or via the Xante Online Support option in the Web Information drop down menu on the Main Installation window NOT 1l Insert the XANTE Utilities CD ROM into your Macintosh The main Installation window should open automatically fig 2 79 If not double click the CD ROM icon then double click the Setup icon D Beam id aaa E oBemewrinuwe Fig 2 79 Main
134. d DALE EL iima In Li E EM Fig 2 63 Main Installation Window Fig 2 64 Utilities Menu 2 Select AdobePS3Fonts from the Software Utilities menu fig 2 63 or select Adobe PS3Fonts from the Utilities menu fig 2 64 The Adobe PostScript 3 Font Installer window appears fig 2 65 Adobe PostScript 3 Font Install WIE nmm mmm tmd Sta rg ge By e A e a t es nope eer Fig 2 65 Font Installer Window 3 Click Continue fig 2 65 The Font Installer License window appears fig 2 66 Cre idm hoe pr mri nis jype domu reyes nee er dine errr i ert LI PAZI PRIUPNE RN AIIUOAPAGHTEE MANTAR EH DGMM 1 acr BrEHETMAT IG BREE BOT TE TEIR MEN DE E ATEAC BU EA ME TRES E ieee Cae Cae Fig 2 66 Font Installer License Window Fig 2 67 PS3Fonts Installer Window Macintosh Setup 2 29 4 Read the license window fig 2 66 then click Accept The PS3Fonts Installer window appears fig 2 67 5 Select Easy Install from the top left drop down menu fig 2 67 Easy install installs Type 1 and TrueType fonts for Adobe PostScript 3 RU If you do a Custom Install you can select the desired fonts to install options include 4 PostScript Type 1 TrueType CE Type 1 and CE True Type 2 6 Click Install fig 2 67 A message window appears to let you close any other running applications fig 2 68 Ain aie r ppc olion can ba numpireg Buriny This iasTallakiun Chiru Dannii pa
135. d Linearization from your computer 1l Insert the XANT Utilities CD ROM into your PC XANT Utilities Installer should launch automatically If not select Start Run Then browse to the XANTE Utilities CD ROM select XInstall xt_prinst exe in the root directory and click OK The XANT Utilities Main window appears fig 3 78 PC Setup 3 37 Ls TAL F D PETATESR TO ihare Fig 3 78 XANT Utilities Main Window Fig 3 79 Select Utility Window 2 Click Software Utilities in the XANTE Utilities Main window The Select Utility window appears fig 3 79 3 Highlight XANT Advanced Graphics Center fig 3 80 then click OK XANT Advanced Graphics Center launches then the Setup Information window appears fig 3 81 Fig 3 80 Select Utility Window Fig 3 81 Setup Information Window 4 Read the Setup Information window then click Next The Destination Location window appears fig 3 82 5 Select the folder where the setup will install the files then click Next The Select Program Folder window appears fig 3 83 3 38 PC Setup ee pati Ora Chana Sober ewe ee e tr whem fl ee Hi Me LLLI iud ma basa aa mmi Fig 3 82 Destination Location Window Fig 3 83 Select Program Folder Window 6 Select the folder s into which you want the program icons added then click Next When setup is complete click Finish View Manuals The View Manuals link opens a copy of your printer s
136. d reinstall your printers using the Adobe PostScript Printers dialog box To delete a previous driver version 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel Then double click Add Remove Programs 2 Select XANT ScreenWriter 4 Utilities in the scroll box on the Install Uninstall tab in the Add Remove Program Properties Window fig 3 4 reta sire nro nup Sra Disk Tis arem prose boa a opo i n CHR D m dia ckt lanal or Irs kirang mias can be Te mE e k ire corepaeretare obici ioa iret lad dolk Adata Acro Heber E spiran 5 and bieren oah Midria ies ORE R Dean 2 Fig 3 4 Add Remove Program Properties Window 3 Click Add Remove 4 Click Yes in the warning window to proceed with removal Then click OK 5 Scroll through and verify that your printer s XANTE Utilities were removed from the scroll box on the Install Uninstall tab Then click OK PC Setup 3 3 Adobe Drivers For Windows 98 and Me the AdobePS 4 4 driver supports Adobe PostScript 3 and earlier Installing AdobePS Printer Driver and Printer PPD Windows 98 Me This section covers installing utilities setting up a parallel or network connection configuring a remote printer running in LPR mode and creating NDPS printers at the server console in a Windows 98 or Me environment Installing Utilities This section covers installing utilities on Windows 98 and Me based computers This process installs your printer s PPD and selected application PDFs or
137. de provides 10 page per minute printing of letter A4 size paper at all three resolutions Y See Printer Memory Requirements in chapter 6 about the RAM required to print at higher resolutions N OTE Z Set available resolutions using either the Graphic DPI configuration menu or the Print dialog box s Resolution menu If the resolution upgrade is installed and adequate RAM is available but the upgrade cannot be selected in your application Print dialog box it is grayed out RAM may not be configured properly in the PPD See the section on configuring the PPD for your operating system in chapter 2 Macintosh or 3 PC Smooth Shading Smooth Shading allows you to use the Adobe PostScript 3 method of rendering gradient blends Smooth Shading produces the highest quality image at the selected resolution For some images PostScript files created with Smooth Shading are smaller and print faster than those created using PostScript Level 2 Set Smooth Shading from your application Print dialog box Off the factory default disables this feature Options of Maximum High Medium Low are available 4 20 Configuration Soft Error Ti d Soft Error alerts you that the printer requires attention Examples are low toner and low paper messages Set Soft Error using the front panel Utility Soft Error configuration menu Yes the factory default enables this feature No disables it While soft error messages are helpful occasionally
138. ded by Windows applications so that the applications work smoothly with a XANTE printer X ACT XANTE Accurate Calibration Technology XANTE patented technology that allows you to calibrate printed line lengths and correct inaccuracies in printing width height skew and angle This is critical when printing color separations and other jobs where pinpoint accuracy is essential for registration See also Registration X HEIGHT The height of a lower case letter without an ascender or descender in a typeface X Screening XANT s method of using a dispersed dot screen also referred to as stochastic screening It varies the distance between individual ink dots in a seemingly random pattern Areas with greater numbers of dots appear darker while those with fewer dots appear lighter 000 Glossary G 11 G 12 Glossary Index Symbols 10 100BaseT G 1 2400 DPI resolution 7 1 A AccelaFont 2 42 3 48 Accelafont ps 2 36 Accurate Calibration Technology 4 9 G 11 Accurate screens 4 11 4 22 PPD option 4 9 Add paper prompt multipurpose feeder 1 15 Adobe Acrobat Reader 3 32 PageMaker 2 75 Web site 2 73 Adobe Acrobat Reader 2 16 2 23 2 30 3 21 Adobe Downloader 2 34 2 35 Clear font cache 2 36 Download PostScript file 2 35 File menu 2 35 Printer font directory 2 35 Printer status 2 35 Restart printer 2 36 Special menu 2 35 Adobe Downloader menu 2 34 Adobe drivers 3 4 Adobe PageMaker Installed Memory 2 23 Optional tray 2 23
139. dia sizes and types handling that media and creating high quality output on the various media Chapter 6 Maintenance Specifications and Warranty describes printer care technical specifications service options and the warranty Chapter 7 Printer Options describes optional upgrades for your printer Chapter 8 Troubleshooting covers troubleshooting issues and technical support options Glossary defines terms related to your printer XANTE utilities and the printing industry Index alphabetically lists major manual topics with corresponding page numbers and some cross references Wi You can print a Menu Layout utility page to use as a quick reference sheet This page N lists front panel menus and their current settings See Utility Pages in chapter 4 for details NOTE v 1 2 Introduction and Installation Manual Conventions The following conventions are used in this manual indicates that you need to press the Return key on a Macintosh or the Enter key on a PC indicates additonal or emphasized information indicates instructions that must be followed to avoid damage to files or equipment indicates instructions that must be followed exactly to avoid personal injury indicates the path for a file or folder and links procedure steps indicates variable information such as the printer name or model Introduction and Installation 1 3 Printer Features The following chart lists FilmMaker 4 pr
140. dow 4 Read the license agreement fig 2 36 then click Accept The AdobePS Install window appears fig 2 37 Chee i ting ea eee tm carin HT ipscaliatina wan eee FP oe oe Bebe curb LLLI 1 wi moi parer cien ide ee er ini nes ur rm rra Meine men or ony es a ia g driumaiintkslisiimr tbri mwenuE cau a Cm ums ser Fig 2 37 AdobePS Install Window Fig 2 38 Installation Was Successful Window 5 Change the driver s destination disk if necessary in the Install Location box fig 2 37 then click Install An Installation Was Successful window appears fig 2 38 6 Click Quit fig 2 38 The Main Installation window reappears fig 2 39 albe IBSEPHTERN iF PST TICERSESOANT Fig 2 89 Main Installation Window Fig 2 40 Registration Form Macintosh Setup 2 15 NOTE Click Register Online fig 2 39 if you are online the Registration web page launches fig 2 40 and you continue to step 8 If you are not online skip to step 9 Complete and submit the registration form fig 2 40 Then close your web browser The Main Installation window reappears fig 2 39 Take the appropriate following action a To continue installing other parts of the Utilities continue to the appropriate installation section Install Adobe Acrobat Reader Install ATM Adobe Type Manager or Install PS3Fonts AY If Adobe Acrobat Reader is not on your system it is recommended that you install it b
141. e Printer features box Highlight the feature to display the options in the Change Setting for box fig 4 5 b Select the setting from the drop down menu in the Change Setting for box 4 6 Configuration c Click Apply after you have made the desired changes For example to change the printer memory setting scroll through the Installable options until you see VMOption Highlight it then select the amount of memory on the printer see the memory size listed on the printer s start up page Click Apply 6 Click OK The Print dialog box reappears Then click OK to send the file to the printer Selecting PPD Options Windows NT 2000 XP To configure a printer feature from the Print dialog box 1 Install and configure the AdobePS printer driver and your printer s PPD following the instructions in chapter 3 2 Choose File Print The Print dialog box appears fig 4 6 Fig 4 6 Windows NT 4 0 Print Dialog Box 3 Make sure your printer is selected in the Name box in the Print dialog box fig 4 6 then click Properties 4 Click the Advanced tab to set printer options fig 4 7 Configuration 4 7 Pan Bien iin pam Ws Senes Pore cha ire ipai ia Dap Taip n Fig 4 7 Windows NT 4 0 Advanced Tab 5 Highlight the feature in the top box then select the setting from the options in the bottom box fig 4 7 6 Click OK The Print dialog box reappears Then click OK to send the file to the
142. e Window Fig 3 34 Restart Computer Window 6 Click Yes to open the ReadMe file or click No to not read it If you select Yes read the readme file when it opens and then close it The Restart Computer Window appears fig 3 34 Select Yes I want to restart my computer now or No I will restart my computer later Then click Finish fig 3 34 If you selected Yes your computer restarts if you selected No you return to the Main Utilities window KY If you did not register your printer earlier the On line Registration window appears DA and you should register your printer now Configuring Your Printer s IP Subnet and Gateway Addresses 1 From the Ps_files folder on the XANTE CD ROM copy dhcpoff ps to your c drive Go to DOS Command Prompt Type the following substituting the appropriate port if necessary COPY DHCPOFF PS LPT1 J Power cycle the printer turn off then back on Using a word processing application open setipsub ps file from the Ps_files folder Edit the file so it contains the IP Subnet and Gateway addresses you obtained from your network administrator Save the file to your c drive Go to DOS Command Prompt Type the following substituting the appropriate port if necessary PC Setup 3 19 COPY SETIPSUB PS LPT1 4 8 Power cycle the printer again and verify that the start up page contains your IP Subnet and Gateway addresses 9 Go to DOS Command Prompt to ping the printer The
143. e cover and printer Replace the two front panel securing screws figs 7 10 and 7 11 Close the fuser cover then close the printer s top cover making sure it latches into place fig 7 9 Options 7 13 Reinstalling the Controller Board Panel 1 Insertthe tab on the top of the controller board panel into the slot above the opening fig 7 6 2 Align tabs on the front of the controller board panel with the slots in the front of the opening then slide the panel forward into place fig 7 6 3 Secure the controller board panel to the printer by tightening the screws on the back of the panel fig 7 5 4 Reconnect all interface cables and reconnect the power cable to the printer and the AC power supply Resolution Upgrades The 2400 dpi resolution upgrade must be done at the factory 000 7 14 Options Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Introduction This chapter describes the status messages that can direct you to the source of a problem suggests solutions for some typical printer setup and print quality problems and provides information about preventing and clearing media jams Status Messages Printer front panel window messages provide printer status information and can help you determine the source of a problem or media jam EARLY PAPER JAM E FIFO E FIXING ROLLER E FUSER E LASER E MOTOR EXIT PAPER JAM FilmMaker 4 FRONT COVER OPEN FRONT PAPER JAM FULL STACK FUSER COVER OPEN A
144. e original position appears as a gray fig 2 105 This is only a preview the change will not take effect unless you click Update Print NOTE Fig 2 105 View Coordinates Window f Print another alignment page see step 3 g Measure the x and y lines on the new test page If the lines are not each 1 25 4 mm from the edge of the paper go back to step 3c and repeat the process 4 Close your browser when the x and y lines are set correctly More X ACT Use XANT s patented X ACT technology to calibrate printer line lengths to exact dimensions You can save a different set of More X ACT values for each different media type your printer supports You need a metric ruler to complete this procedure 2 50 Macintosh Setup 1 Go to the printer home page fig 2 106 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 2 106 Printer Home Page Fig 2 107 More X ACT Window 2 Select Printer Configuration PostScript More X ACT fig 2 106 The More X ACT window appears fig 2 107 3 Follow the directions in the More X ACT window to calibrate your printer s output to exact dimensions WwW More X ACT is a cumulative process If you are not satisfied with the calibration you may want to repeat the calibration process Also you can reset calibration values to factory defaults by clicking Reset in the More X ACT window NOTE hi 4 Close your browser after you finish the calibration and
145. e printed output Multiply this number by the ratio of the printed output size to the original image size SR Print Image LPI x 2 x Image Size Ratio 6 4 Troubleshooting SR the Scan resolution Image Size Ratio printed image size original image size For example for a line screen of 95 set the scanner resolution 190 dpi 95 x 2 To print the same image at 75 of original size set the scanner resolution to 142 dpi 95 x 2 x 75 Scanning the image at a lower than optimum resolution results in less detail Scanning at a higher resolution increases file size and processing time and it may only slightly increase the amount of detail Print Quality Issues This section provides tips for resolving output quality problems Solid black print on the image or text is washed out Prin Media may be damp or otherwise damaged Make sure it meets the requirements in Media Specifications in chapter 5 If necessary replace the media See Standard Cassette and Multipurpose Feeder in chapter 1 Toner may have settled in the cartridge Remove and shake it gently to redistribute the toner See Toner Cartridge in chapter 1 The density setting may not be appropriate Adjust it See Adjusting Print Density in chapter 4 The toner may be low in the cartridge or the cartridge may be old or damaged Replace it See Toner Cartridge in chapter 1 Random black dots appear on the printed media Printer
146. e that lists the selected resolution installed RAM hard disk identities page count enabled interfaces and network information if the Ethernet upgrade is installed each time the printer is turned on Set Start up Page from the Utility Start Page configuration menu from the browser Informational Pages or by downloading Adobe PostScript files to the printer In the front panel Utility Start Page menu On the factory default enables the feature and Off disables it In the browser utilities Informational Pages allows you to turn the Start up Page feature on or off and Utilities Pages allow you to print this page on demand XANTE Utilities CD ROM contains the PostScript files Startpg on and Startpg off Download these files to the printer to enable Startpgon ps or disable Startpgoff ps the feature See PS Files Folder and Using Adobe Downloader in chapter 2 Macintosh and PS_Files Folder in chapter 3 PC for instructions To print a start up page manually take the printer off line and press the Test key After the page prints press the Online key to put the printer back on line Toner Cartridge Control If your printer does not produce the rich black images that you expect try redistributing the toner in the cartridge and adjusting the print density before replacing the toner cartridge Redistributing Toner If you have not used the toner cartridge in several days toner may have settled Remove the cartridge
147. ead the Welcome Window then click Next The Standard TCP IP registration window appears fig 3 56 PC Setup 3 27 ad Pi amiri ane des ere em a depends eee igo a erst Tem sn Perm aer s P m uns nm UN us FN Gomes TE DT io lis diens m Har ern naa emm n cm M Eie const ha phian qoem aeta eect ate cuin gsm rang o a LLL os F x Dea unici aer ta dea pr censa am a iier nci jai Den gm PIU Temm al sek meh coe Fig 3 56 Standard TCP IP Window Fig 3 57 Standard Network Window 14 Enter your printer s IP address and click Next The Standard Network window appears fig 3 57 15 Select Standard Generic Network Card fig 3 57 then click Next When complete click Finish on the next window 16 Close the window and the Printer Properties window reappears fig 3 53 Click Apply to assign the printer name to the IP address Reconfiguring the PPD after Adding Options If you change options such as installing an optional feeder and tray or a memory upgrade you need to reconfigure the PPD to reflect the change s RY The optional feeder and tray upgrade is used as an example for this procedure N NOTE To update the PPD configuration 1 Select Start Settings Printers Windows 98 Me or select Start Settings Printers and Faxes Windows NT 2000 XP The Printers window Windows 98 Me or Printers and Faxes window Windows NT 2000 XP appears figs 58 and 59 3 28 PC Setup
148. earization window reappears fig 3 170 If you need to stop linearization for example to change the media type you can click Cancel to stop 11 Click Save to printer fig 3 170 if you want to save the data file for future use Then specify a new file name and select a folder for saving the file Click Save Otherwise skip to step 12 12 Click OK to close the Linearization window If you want to verify linearization click the Verify Calibration button fig 3 170 before you close the Linearization window When this page prints compare it to the original calibration page to verify the gamma correction you should see an improvement in grayscale progression Advanced Gamma Control If you are an expert user you may want to adjust image lowlights midtones highlights and details in a gamma curve using the Advanced option in the Linearization window fig 3 170 You cannot see the advanced window adjustments on screen Unless you are an advanced user you should make these adjustments through an application 1 Select the gamma curve to update from Update Transfer Curve in the Linearization window fig 3 171 PC Setup 3 79 Pulse amice Selling Ej Fig 3 172 Linearization Window Fig 3 173 Advanced Settings Window 2 Click Advanced The Advanced Settings window appears fig 3 173 Use the appropriate scroll bars to make the adjustment and click OK to return the Linearization window fig 3 172 3 Click
149. eclaration of Conformity The Product FilmMaker 4 has been designed and manufactured in accordance with the following international standards EN 50081 1 Generic Emissions Standard for Residential Commercial and Light Industrial Products of 01 Feb 1991 EN 50082 1 Generic Immunity Standard for Residential Commercial and Light Industrial Products of 01 Feb 1991 EN 55022 Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference Information Technology Equipment of 14 April 1987 IEC 1000 4 2 Testing Measurement Techniques Electrostatic Discharge of 1995 First Edition IEC 1000 4 3 Testing and Measurement Techniques Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field Immunity Test of 1995 First Edition IEC 1000 4 4 Testing and Measurement Techniques Electrical Fast Transient Burst Immunity Test of 1995 First edition MIL STD 45662A Calibration System Requirements EN 60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment including Electrical Business Equipment I the undersigned hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above Directives and Standards am j k rs af L E A Place Mobile Alabama Date December 7 1995 Robert C Ross Jr President Colophon and Credits This manual was written using Adobe PageMaker Adobe Acrobat Adobe Photoshop Adobe Illustrator and FreeHand The typefaces for the main body of the manual are Minion Akzidenz Grotesk Times Helvetica Symbol and Courier
150. ecting Menu Options The following example explains changing the printer s default resolution from 2400 x 2400 dpi to 600 x 600 dpi using control keys and configuration menus 1 Make sure the printer is on and idle 2 Press the Menu key until SETUP GRAPHIC appears 3 Press the Enter key to enter the Graphic menu Configuration 4 3 4 Press the Menu key until GRAPHIC DPI appears in the window 5 Press the Enter key to enter the Dpi menu 6 Press the Menu key until dpi 600 600 appears 7 Press the Enter key to select 600 dpi as the default An asterisk appears next to the selection indicating it is now the current default 8 Press the On Line key READY IDLE appears in the window The printer s default resolution is now 600 x 600 dpi Resetting to Factory Defaults There are two levels for resetting to factory defaults Level 1 full reset and Level 2 partial reset Level 1 Reset Level 1 resets all printer options to factory default settings To do a level 1 reset turn off the printer hold in the Online Tray Select and Test keys turn on the printer Release the keys after RESET 1 appears in the window Level 2 Reset Level 2 resets printer options to factory default settings except for printer margins gamma settings IP network parameters and More X ACT settings To do a level 2 reset turn off the printer hold down the Online and Tray Select keys Release the keys after RESET 2 appears in the window Men
151. ed by your printer warranty Handling the Toner Cartridge Use these guidelines to ensure maximum life and print quality from your toner cartridge and to prevent cartridge or printer damage Use toner cartridges before their expiration dates Cartridge shelf life is approximately 2 years unopened or 6 months opened Never move the printer with the cartridge installed Toner spills can damage the printer and affect print quality 1 6 Introduction and Installation Do not expose the cartridge to bright lights or direct sunlight Keep the cartridge in its protective bag until installation If you must remove the cartridge temporarily place it in the original bag or wrap it well to protect it from light Do not open the drum shutter or touch the drum s surface The shutter protects the photosensitive drum from light Keep the cartridge away from computer hard disks and monitors It contains a magnet that can cause data loss or equipment damage Store unopened cartridges right side up on a level surface Always set the cartridge flat with the handles on the top Dispose of the cartridge following safety laws and regulations o The toner is highly combustible Never dispose of it by incineration Removing and Installing the Toner Cartridge Tj Check the density dial when you replace a toner cartridge The dial setting for the previous cartridge may be too high or too low for the new cartridge See Adjusting
152. eful measurements not the printed coordinates If current settings are not the factory defaults and you must adjust the coordinates you may reset factory default coordinates by selecting Reset Margins and clicking Update Print another alignment test page using the factory defaults measure the lines and make adjustments if necessary d Measure the distance from the edge of the page to the x line it should measure 1 25 4 mm This distance is dependent on the y coordinate If an adjustment needs to be made use the following appropriate procedure To move the x line away from the edge of the page select an appropriate plus value in the X Coordinate field To move the x line closer to the edge of the page select an appropriate minus value in the X Coordinate field Measure the distance from the edge of the page to the y line it should measure 1 25 4 mm This distance is dependent on the x coordinate If an adjustment needs to be made use the following appropriate procedure To move the y line away from the page s edge select an appropriate plus value in the Y Coordinate field To move the y line closer to the page s edge select an appropriate minus value in the Y Coordinate field Macintosh Setup 2 49 WW You can preview a coordinate changes effect on image placement To do this change the x and y mA coordinates as desired then click View Coordinates The shifts accordingly on the screen page and th
153. elayedOutputClose PrinterControl Filtering PrintHost HasNames OutputDevice ReceiveWindowSize and SendWindowSize settings x Sl RIFE angor rip piu a L m Em e Ei muc Fig 2 141 LPR Information Page Fig 2 142 Parallel Information Page f The Parallel Information Page fig 2 142 lists On Type Enabled Protocol DelayedOutputClose Interpreter PrinterControl HasNames Handshake nAckPulseWidth nStrobeExpectedPulseWidth and OutputDevice settings g The USB Information Page fig 2 143 lists On Type Enabled Protocol DelayedOutputClose Interpreter PrinterControl HasNames and OutputDevice settings RY The USB port is only active in the PC environments not the Macintosh 6 SS o environments Fig 2 143 USB Information Page 4 Close the browser 2 64 Macintosh Setup Installed Options The Installed Options option allows you to check the installation status of your print s options 1 Go to the printer home page fig 2 144 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 2 144 Printer Home Page Fig 2 145 Installed Options Window 2 Select Printer Information Installed Options fig 2 144 The Installed Options window appears fig 2 145 3 Check the right side of the window fig 2 145 to determine the installation status of the printer s options Ew Options not applicable to your printer may still appear in the options list their statu
154. en True is selected your printer automatically switches to another media source when the current source runs out of media as long as the following conditions are met 3 16 PC Setup All selected media sources must contain the same size media If the printer detects a different size media when it switches to a new tray the printer stops printing All trays must be inserted properly When Tray Switch is set to True an incorrectly positioned tray prevents the printer from printing Tray Chaining only applies to the cassette s not to the Multipurpose tray e A z Ka Installed Memory The Installed Memory feature must be set to agree with your printer and Chooser memory configurations Options include 64 MB the factory default 128 MB and 256 MB If your printer has an installed memory upgrade it will not appear in your application s Resolution menu unless Installed Memory is configured properly Optional Tray The Optional Tray setting must be set to agree with your printer and Chooser configurations Otherwise the tray will not appear or be selectable from within your application Options include Not Installed the factory default and Installed XANTE Win95 98 Me LPR Tool 1 Click Software Utilities in the XANTE Utilities Main window fig 3 27 The Select Utility window appears fig 3 28 FI 7 MEME E F r ENSTALL T FU PRINTER C3 MANUS T nm ime erras Fig 3 27 XANT M
155. en is inversely proportional to the levels of gray produced If the resolution is held constant increasing the line screen decreases the levels of gray possible in an image Linearization Calibration of equipment to a linear standard so that the output value of color or gray tone equals matches the input value Glossary G 5 Margin Non imprinted space around edge of page Midtone Dot Commonly taken as the area between the highlight and shadow area in a halftone image Mirror Image An image which is flipped horizontally reversing the position of its parts Mirror Print An image which is rotated horizontally 180 This produces a mirror image of the original Some XANTE printers feature a mirror print option that allows you to create a mirror image without having to alter the file settings to do so Myriad Film XANT s new polyester based material specifically designed to be used with your printer and FilmStar 4 This computer to film technology produces high quality positive and negative film from your desktop without the time and expense of camera and darkroom procedures Negative Print An image in which the white and black values are reversed NEIT XANT s patented Negative Enhanced Imaging Technology NEIT This technology allows you to reduce distortion of gray scale images and plugging filling in of small white spaces that were common when printing a negative image on a laser printer See Negative Print and
156. ent of printing plates to print a crisp clear image See also X ACT Resident Typefaces Typefaces stored on the printer s hard disk s RAM or ROM Resident typefaces allow the printer to produce a print job without accessing the host computer for typeface descriptions G 8 Glossary Resolution A measure of the image detail produced by a device Printer resolution is measured in dots per inch dpi Depending on the model XANTE printers feature from 600 x 600 dpi up to 2400 x 2400 dpi resolutions RIP Raster Image Processor The part of an output system that converts image data or page description information into a bitmap format by assigning each pixel its on or off value ROM Read Only Memory ROM is permanent memory Information in the computer s ROM is retained even when the power is turned off Router A device that connects two networks together A router can connect networks with different cable types A router assigns a specific address to each network and manages the traffic between these Screening In this manual s context the various methods used to simulate continuous tone images on a printer by varying the size shape or frequency of the dots printed on media Shadow Dot The lowest density of a halftone image SIMM Single In Line Memory Module A small compact circuit board containing RAM Random Access Memory chips Your printer uses SIMM based firmware for the 2400 dpi resolution upgrade See also RA
157. eout menu 4 19 Toner Page menu 4 23 Tray Switching menu 4 23 Configuring Macintosh OS X 2 9 PPD Macintosh 2 18 PPD Windows 95 98 Me 3 10 Consumables Phone number 5 8 Toner reorder page 4 25 Consumables effect on Warranty 6 11 Control D end of job 3 42 Controller G 2 Controller board 7 5 Access 7 4 Caution 7 7 Housing 7 10 IDE hard disk 7 4 RAM 7 4 7 5 Reinstalling 7 12 Removing 7 7 Resolution 7 4 Upgrades 7 4 Warning 7 7 Copyright iii Cover 2 60 Media weight 2 21 3 14 Cover media weight 4 17 Index l 3 Crop marks G 2 Cross ship exchange 6 9 Customer support 6 10 8 21 Fax number 8 21 Phone number 8 21 D D ps 2 36 3 42 Data LED 4 2 Default input tray 2 58 Default settings G 2 Defaults changing G 2 Densitometer G 2 Support 1 5 6 8 Density 2 55 3 60 4 11 8 7 8 9 8 11 G 2 G 8 Density dial 1 9 4 23 Density menu 4 11 Description pdf 2 36 Description txt 3 42 Details lost 8 4 DHCP 2 56 4 15 DHCPOFF ps 2 36 DHCPON ps 2 36 Diagnostic information 2 60 Diagnostic tests 1 16 Dimensions printer 6 7 Display window messages 8 1 Docs menu 2 31 Dot gain G 2 Dot gain calibration G 2 Custom G 2 Dot shape 4 21 Dots per inch G 3 Double sided printing 5 7 Download fonts 2 35 Download PostScript file 2 35 Downloaded font G 2 Downloaded fonts 2 71 Removing 2 72 Reviewing 2 72 DPI 2 43 3 48 G 3 Dpimenu 4 20 Drift G 3 F4 Index Driver G 8 Drivers 3 4 Installing 3 4 Drum 5 4 Duplex key 4 2 Dup
158. er To Printer Fig 1 33 USB Cable See USB Connection for PC Only in chapter 3 for details on connecting this cable to the printer and your computer Warranty and Product Registration Chapter 6 contains your printer s warranty Be sure to register your printer to receive a 50 discount toward your next purchase of XANT consumables You can register online at www xante com or return the warranty sheet included with your printer 000 Introduction and Installation 1 19 1 20 Introduction and Installation Chapter 2 Macintosh Setup Introduction This chapter describes your printer s Macintosh setup including connecting to the Ethernet port as well as installing utilities drivers your printer s PPD PostScript Printer Description and related files It also describes using your browser to access printer features and using Adobe Downloader Before beginning setup you should be familiar with standard Macintosh procedures Port Connection Ethernet Port To connect to the Ethernet port 1 Turn off your computer Ethernet Port RJ 45 Connector Fig 2 1 Connect to Ethernet Port 2 Connect one end of the CAT 5 Ethernet cable to your printer s Ethernet port fig 2 1 3 Connect the cable s other end to the appropriate port on your network or directly to a computer if you are using a crossover patch cable Before using your printer set it up for your network environment and configure the Ethernet int
159. erface See the next section for details Configuring EtherTalk Ethernet is a multiple protocol medium that allows you to run several network protocols concurrently An EtherTalk network allows you to run the AppleTalk protocol on a physical base which can be three to five times faster than a LocalTalk network Macintosh Setup 2 1 R Typically only Macintosh computers are installed on an EtherTalk network If you sA have PCs operating in an EtherTalk network see the documentation that came with your PC EtherTalk interface The following steps are required to set up your XANT printer on an EtherTalk network Port Connection Ethernet Port earlier in this chapter covers step 1 the next two sections cover steps 2 and 3 1 Connect your XANTE printer to the network through the Ethernet port 2 Configure your Macintosh for EtherTalk See the next section Configure the Macintosh for EtherTalk for details 3 Change the EtherTalk Zone name if necessary using the Setzone ps file and Adobe Downloader or via your browser See Change the EtherTalk Zone Name later in this chapter for details Configure the Macintosh for EtherTalk Configure your connection through the AppleTalk Control Panel under Apple menu Control Panels AppleTalk on a Macintosh with OS 8 X or higher Go to the Apple menu select Control Panels and then select AppleTalk Select Ethernet from the drop down menu Change the EtherTalk Zone Name On a
160. erred XANT dealer or your XANT Consumables Sales Representative at 800 540 7091 US and Canada Make sure to indicate which type of film you want Myriad Clear or Myriad Matte Myriad Matte Film Myriad Matte Film Myriad Clear Film Myriad Clear Film Part Number Size Part Number Size 200 100001 8 50 x 11 00 Letter 200 100107 8 50 x 11 00 Letter 215 mm x 279 mm 215 mm x 279 mm 200 100002 8 26 x 11 69 A4 200 100108 8 26 x 11 69 A4 210 mm x 297 mm 210 mm x 297 mm 200 100003 11 00 x 17 00 Ledger 200 100109 11 00 x 17 00 Ledger 279 mm x 431 mm 279 mm x 431 mm 200 100004 11 69 x 16 54 A3 200 100110 11 69 x 16 54 A3 297 mm x 420 mm 297 mm x 420 mm 200 100005 10 00 x 15 00 200 100111 13 00 x 18 50 Universal 254 mm x 381 mm 330 mm x 470 mm 5 8 Media Selecting Handling and Printing 200 100006 11 75 x 18 00 298 mm x 457 mm 200 100007 12 00 x 18 00 304 mm x 457 mm 200 100036 12 00 x 25 00 304 mm x 635 mm 200 100062 13 00 x 18 50 Universal 330 mm x 470 mm 200 100063 13 00 x 25 00 330 mm x 635 mm 200 100072 13 00 x 35 50 330 mm x 902 mm Printing Envelopes Use the multipurpose feeder or the envelope cassette following the procedures in chapter 1 the media specifications earlier in this chapter and the following guidelines when printing envelopes Do not use gummed envelopes or envelopes with adhesive tape Before loading an envelope
161. fig 2 2 If not double click the CD ROM icon then double click the Setup icon mpm hides Ciramtisnaly Pann Duer Eaglisb Fig 2 2 Main Installation Window Fig 2 8 Language Menu 2 Select the desired language from the drop down menu in the Main Installation window fig 2 2 or from the Language menu fig 2 3 English is the factory default Other options are Chinese Simplified Chinese Traditional Danish Dutch Finnish French German Italian Japanese Korean Norwegian Portuguese Brazilian Spanish and Swedish Macintosh Setup 2 3 Macintosh OS X Printer Installation This section describes how to install your printer on your Macintosh OS X system You must have Mac OS X version 10 1 5 or 10 2 1 to install your printer properly 1l Verify that AppleTalk is enabled a Select Apple menu System Preferences Network The Network window appears fig 2 4 b Select Built in Ethernet from the drop down Show menu fig 2 4 Next select the AppleTalk tab select Make AppleTalk Active and click Apply Now Then close the window ap fan eee uid he Fig 2 4 Network Window Fig 2 5 Utilities Installation Window 2 Insert the XANTE Utilities CD ROM into your Macintosh Double click the OSX_setup icon The Utilities Installation window appears fig 2 5 3 Select your printer from the Install Printer drop down menu fig 2 5 Print Center will open automatically If you have OS X version 10 1
162. fig 3 2 PC Setup 3 1 Ethernet Port RJ 45 Connector Fig 3 2 Connect to the Ethernet Port Before using your printer set it up for your network environment and configure the Ethernet interface using the appropriate procedures later in this chapter USB Connection for PC Only To connect to the USB Universal Serial Bus port Connector Connector To Host Computer To Printer Fig 3 8 USB Cable 1 Plug the USB cable s square smaller connector into the printer s USB port fig 3 3 2 Plug the thin larger connector into the computer s USB port pp It is not necessary to turn off your printer or your computer before plugging in the AY os Installing Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers If you did a custom install during setup and did not install the printer drivers and support files you must install the Adobe PostScript driver and your printer s PPD before using your printer 3 2 PC Setup Deleting Previous Driver Versions Normally you do not have to delete previous Adobe PostScript printer drivers or any previously installed Adobe PostScript printers However if you suspect installation problems first remove your installed printers from the Printers dialog box in the Windows Control Panel and reinstall them via the Adobe PostScript Printers dialog box which is also in the Windows Control Panel If after removing and reinstalling your printers you still experience problems delete all previous driver versions an
163. finish You also can register your printer or access XANT online support through your XANT Utilities See Register Online and Access XANT Online Support earlier in this chapter for details Managing Fonts Fonts downloaded to your printer are considered resident which means applications do not have to bundle these fonts with print jobs You can download additional fonts to the printer s memory Fonts downloaded to printer memory remain only through the current power cycle Fonts downloaded to memory may cause PostScript errors due to insufficient memory To solve this increase printer memory or add an optional hard disk and download the fonts to it 2 70 Macintosh Setup NOTE The XANT Utilities CD ROM includes Adobe Downloader in the XanteInstallers XANTE Utilities folder Use this program to load and manage font files in your printer and to send PostScript files to your printer To download Macintosh fonts 1 Open the Adobe Downloader and select File Download Fonts to bring up the following window fig 2 158 Outline Fonts Available Outline Fonts Selected E Amri E Macinto pre Zp AmeriBol Eject AmeriBol L AmeriExtBol Amerilta Desktop _ AvantGarBooObl C AvantGarDem Add All 2 AvantGarDemObl Remove BenguBol pj L BenguBoo Cancel L Bodon D iaaa C BodonBol jownloa BodonBollta BodonPos Ha BookmDem u o y Fig 2 158 Download Font Window 2
164. from the printer and shake the cartridge gently to redistribute toner Replace the cartridge in the printer See Toner Cartridge in chapter 1 Adjusting Print Density You can increase or decrease the amount of toner laid down by the printer using the print density dial y The amount of toner used increases as printer dial settings move from low L to high o4 z 4 H Printing with too high a setting shortens the life of the toner cartridge and may degrade print quality 4 22 Configuration To adjust the print density dial 1 Open the multipurpose feeder by grasping the handle in the top center of the cover and pulling down fig 4 12 A The multipurpose feeder does not open to a 90 angle To prevent damage to the feeder do not exert strong pressure or place heavy objects on it Fig 4 12 Open Multipurpose Feeder Fig 4 13 Adjust Print Density Dial 2 Turn the print density dial toward the H Higher density to darken the print or toward the L Lower density to lighten the print fig 4 13 3 Close the Multipurpose Feeder R Check the print density dial when you replace a toner cartridge The setting required b for the previous cartridge may be too high or too low for the new cartridge NOTE Toner Page The Toner Page feature automatically prints a toner reorder form when the cartridge needs to be replaced To order a new cartridge fill out the form and return it to XANTE or to your XANT
165. h the media was fed 5 Reassemble the printer Clearing Media Jams This section describes removing media jams from specific locations Remove media jams slowly and carefully to prevent tearing the media Media scraps in the printer can become a fire hazard Clearing a Paper Cassette or Multipurpose Feeder Jam 1 Squeeze top cover latch to release the lock fig 8 2 KY If media is in the output tray remove it before lifting the top cover Fig 8 2 Release Top Cover Latch Fig 8 8 Open Top Cover and Multipurpose Feeder 2 Lift the top cover The multipurpose feeder opens automatically as you open the top cover fig 8 3 6 14 Troubleshooting The multipurpose feeder does not open to a 90 angle To prevent damage do not exert strong pressure or place heavy objects on the feeder 3 Remove all media from the multipurpose feeder fig 8 4 Fig 8 4 Remove Media from Multipurpose Fig 8 5 Remove Media Jam from Multipurpose Feeder Feeder 4 Remove any jammed media from the multipurpose feeder fig 8 5 5 Remove the cassette from the printer a Pul the cassette straight out until it stops fig 8 6 Fig 8 6 Pull Out Cassette Fig 8 7 Lift up and Pull out Cassette b Lift up slightly then pull the cassette from the printer fig 8 7 Troubleshooting 8 15 6 Remove any crumpled media from the cassette fig 8 8 Fig 8 8
166. hapter 5 Make sure media is loaded according to the procedures and guidelines in Standard Cassette and Multipurpose Feeder in chapter 1 and Media Sources in chapter 5 Make sure the output tray does not become overfilled Remove all media from the multipurpose feeder before turning on the printer Reinsert the media when the printer displays the Ready Idle message Use XANT supplied toner Use XANT Myriad film Keep the printer clean See Cleaning the Printer in chapter 6 Use the cassette cover to prevent dust and debris from settling on the media and getting into the printer Locating Jams Media Jams occur along the paper path in the areas illustrated in figure 8 1 Fig 8 1 The Printer Paper Path In the media source either a paper cassette or the multipurpose feeder and the toner cartridge A In the back of the paper feeder B Around the toner cartridge C d In the paper exit area under the fuser cover D Use one of the following two procedures to locate a media jam then see Clearing Media Jams later in this chapter for details on removing the jam Troubleshooting 8 13 Locating Jams 1 Check for media jams in the paper cassette or multipurpose feeder from which the media was fed 2 Check for media jams in the paper exit area under the fuser cover 3 Check for media jams around the toner cartridge 4 Check for media jams in the back of the paper feeder from whic
167. hen select Change 4 Close the browser Reset Factory Defaults Reset Factory defaults allows you to reset the printer name and EtherTalk Zone to enable start up page and low toner page printing to enable DHCP and to reset PostScript margins to factory default settings E If you select reset to factory default enabling DHCP could affect your IP address ui 6 sA 3 60 PC Setup 1 Go to the printer home page fig 3 126 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 3 126 Printer Home Page Fig 3 127 Reset Factory Defaults Window 2 Select Printer Configuration Reset Factory Defaults fig 3 126 The Print Reset Factory Defaults window appears fig 3 127 3 Click Reset Factory Defaults Your printer will restart and the changes will be in effect Storage Devices Hard Disk and RAM Disk Storage Devices allows you to display current hard disk and RAM disk settings and configure the device To display hard disk settings and configure the device 1 Goto the printer home page fig 3 128 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 3 128 Printer Home Page Fig 3 129 Hard Disk Settings Window 2 Select Printer Configuration Storage Devices Hard Disk fig 3 128 The Hard Disk Settings window appears fig 3 129 showing current settings If you want to reformat the hard disk continue to step 3 if not skip to step 4 PC Setup 3 61 3 Click Format a war
168. ia If the printer detects a different size media when it switches to a new tray the printer stops printing All trays must be inserted properly When Tray Switch is set to True an incorrectly positioned tray prevents the printer from printing Installed Memory The Installed Memory feature must be set to agree with your printer and Chooser memory configurations If your printer has an installed memory upgrade it will not appear in your application s Resolution menu unless Installed Memory is configured properly Optional Tray The Optional Tray setting must be set to agree with your printer and Chooser configurations Otherwise the tray will not appear or be selectable from within your application Options include Not Installed the factory default and Installed Installing Auxiliary Utilities XANTE Utilities included access to several other programs and files which you may find very helpful when working with your printer These include Adobe Acrobat Reader Adobe Type Manager ATM and Adobe PS3Fonts screen fonts for the resident printer fonts Install Adobe Acrobat Reader XANTE Utilities CD ROM documentation is in Adobe Acrobat Portable Documentation Format PDF If you do not have Adobe Acrobat Reader on your system you should install it now Macintosh Setup 2 23 You can install Adobe Acrobat Reader from the XANTE Utilities via the Utilities menu or via the Software Utilities Adobe Acrobat Reader link 1 Insert the XAN
169. ift the transfer roller up and out at a 45 angle 6 4 Maintenance and Specifications Fig 6 2 Transfer Roller 4 Clean toner from the transfer roller with a soft bristle brush 5 Vacuum the area using a soft brush attachment or blow it with compressed air o Wear protective safety glasses when using compressed air e Do not pull out wires while performing this step 6 Lower the roller back into place with the gear end to the left Make sure the lever protruding below the transfer roller fits inside the small opening on the door 7 Push the roller into its holding clips The roller assembly should spring back freely when pressed Toner and Manual Feed Area Cleaning Clean the toner and manual feed area after removing a paper jam or replacing the toner cartridge 1 Turn off the printer and disconnect it from the power source then remove the paper jam or the toner cartridge Maintenance and Specifications 6 5 A The fuser becomes very hot during operation Always allow the fuser to cool completely before opening the fuser cover If a paper jam occurs in the fuser area turn off the printer and wait at least 30 minutes before attempting to clear the jam 2 Remove any paper scraps and wipe off paper and toner dust with a dry clean cloth fig 6 3 Se xe Fig 6 8 Toner and Manual Feed Area Cleaning 3 Reassemble the printer and reconnect it to the power source Exterior Cleaning 1 Tu
170. ig 2 154 The Utilities Pages window appears fig 2 155 3 Select Print to the right of the utility page you wish to print Start Page Low Toner Page Network Page Font List Page Font Sample Page Menu Layout or Engine Testpage Depending on the selected page printing takes approximately 6 to 30 seconds 4 Close your browser XANT Web Access XANT Web Site Register Printer and Help When you are online you can access XANT s web site register your printer or obtain technical help 1 Goto the printer home page fig 2 156 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 2 156 Printer Home Page Macintosh Setup 2 69 2 Select the desired web access http www xante com XANT s web site Register Printer or Help fig 2 156 When the selected site s window appears take the following appropriate action a http www xante com Browse the web site for desired information This site offers fast access to product support contact trade show career XANT and other printer related information When you finish skip to step 3 b Register Printer Fill out and submit the registration form Then skip to step 3 c Help Browse XANT s Support site fig 2 157 for the desired information You can search for information by product links by topics through the search option or by the Frequently Asked Questions option Fig 2 157 Support Window 3 Close your browser when you
171. ined with XANT Advanced Graphics x XAN tim Center software measures grayscale output for calibration and proofing This affordable easy to use densitometer will be referenced in this manual for example purposes only 8 Measure individual patches on the calibration page by placing the page on a white background then center the densitometer s lens over the patch and either click the black button on top of the XD 1 or click the measure button on the Densitometer Data Entry window fig 3 171 The measurement appears in the box to the right of the Measure button 9 Make sure to enter the solid black 1 and solid white 2 measurements first Enter the number of the patch whose densitometer measurement most closely matches within 2 the corresponding percentage in section 3 of the Densitometer Data Entry window For example when you are reading for 296 if the box labeled 7 measures 296 enter the number 7 in the corresponding box Wi The calibration page blocks are numbered from 0 to 255 You may have to check DA several blocks to find the one that most closely matches the percentage in the Densitometer Data Entry window 3 78 PC Setup Also it is not necessary to measure for each coverage value listed in the Densitometer Data Entry window but it is recommended to do so to achieve more accurate results 10 Click Graph to display a curve of your printer s linear curve Then click Linearize to continue The Lin
172. ing each measurement in its corresponding box on the calibration page The values in boxes G and H are fixed values and do not require you to make any measurements 7 Copy the recorded measurements in boxes A through F I and J and the fixed values in the 3 82 PC Setup in boxes G and H from the calibration page to the corresponding boxes Enter Calibration Values section of the More X ACT window 8 Click Update Printer When you click Update Printer a window displays the Printer Calibrated message Click OK to continue and all the numbers clear automatically from the boxes in the Enter Calibration Values section Do not enter the values again Also if you click Reset Printer you can reset all settings or the selected media type g 9 Repeat steps 5 through 8 until the measurements in the corresponding boxes are within 5 mm of each other FR Your application printer properties must match your calibration settings For Emi example if you chose User defined 1 as your media type in the More X ACT calibration window for 11 x 17 tabloid paper you must choose User defined 1 as your Media Weight in your application printer properties when printing on 11 x 17 paper 10 Click Close The More X ACT window closes Managing Fonts To download fonts to your printer or to remove specific fonts see the documentation for your font downloader program To remove all downloaded fonts from printer memory turn the pr
173. inter s IP address This address appears 2 on the printer startup page The Printer Home Page appears fig 3 88 Fig 3 88 Printer Home Page Fig 3 89 Registration Form Select Register Printer fig 3 88 Your browser launches and accesses the 3 registration page on XANT s web site 3 40 PC Setup 4 Complete and submit the registration form fig 3 89 Then close your web browser R You can also select Open a Printable Form to print a registration form that you can fill fA out and send to XANTE via regular mail or fax Miscellaneous Procedures This section covers miscellaneous procedures to make working in the PC environment easier CD ROM PostScript Files Feature Access You can access and control many printer features via PostScript files on the XANTE Utilities CD ROM These files to help you in such areas as keeping track of your printer s status performing specific functions and printing font samples For example you can set your printer s EtherTalk zone name control startup page printing or initialize an internal hard disk See PDFs Folder and PS_Files Folder later in this chapter for details on the PC files their uses and how to download them PDFs Folder This folder contains the PDF Printer Description File for the your printer QuarkXPress versions prior to 3 3 2 require these files in addition to the PPD Use these PDFs to ensure the highest quality output from your printer and Qua
174. inter If you need to change it highlight your printer then go to the Printers menu and select Set as Default The black dot now appears in front of the selected printer c Skip to step 6 Macintosh Setup 2 5 5 Do the following if you are using OS X version 10 2 1 a Click the Add icon when Print Center opens fig 2 9 iem NEN IE dara 4 eaa i ic aman p Daph rni ium ra ma az Fig 2 9 Add Printer Window b Select AppleTalk in the top drop down menu select AppleTalk Network in the second drop down menu fig 2 10 highlight your printer in the list under Name select XANT from the Printer Model drop down menu select your printer s PPD from the Model Name drop down menu and then click Add The Printer List window reappears with your printer listed WW The install location of your printer s PPD is Hard Drive Library Printers PPDS Contents Resources EN LPROJ folder amp Fer lil qae fmm Fig 2 10 Printer List Window The printer whose name appears in bold type is the default printer If you need to change the default printer highlight the desired printer and then click the Make Default icon The selected printer s name now will appear in bold type c Configure the printer s options 2 6 Macintosh Setup NOTE 1 Highlight the printer under Name in the Printer List Then select Printer Menu Show Options The Printer Info window appears fig 2 1
175. inter Home Page To access your printer s home page 1 Turn on your printer and then the computer Macintosh Setup 2 37 Sv You must assign the printer a valid IP address for you network before you can use the b v4 browser NOTE 2 Open your browser and enter your printer s IP address This address appears on the printer startup page The Printer Home Page appears fig 2 82 Fig 2 82 Printer Home Page The home page has four major categories Printer Configuration Printer Information Printer Maintenance and Utility Pages Printer Configuration To access printer configuration features 1 Goto the printer home page fig 2 83 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 2 83 Printer Home Page Fig 2 84 Printer Configuration Options 2 Select Printer Configuration fig 2 83 printer configuration options appear fig 2 84 Printer Configuration options include Informational Pages Network PostScript Print Quality Reset to Factory Defaults Storage Devices and Trays and Media fig 2 84 Informational Pages Start Page Low Toner Page and Network Page The Information Pages window allows you enable or disable printing of the start up page low toner page and Network Page 2 38 Macintosh Setup 1 Goto the printer home page fig 2 85 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 2 85 Printer Home Page Fig 2 86 Informational Pages Window
176. inter features Features IDT 79RC3255 Processor RAM 64 MB 128 MB 256 MB maximum Adobe PostScript 3 136 PostScript Fonts Resolutions 600 x 600 dpi 1200 x 1200 dpi 2400 x 2400 dpi Engine Speed letter A4 10 ppm Interfaces Parallel Ethernet EtherTalk LPR TCP IP IPP USB PC only Paper Sizes From 3 94 x 5 83 100 mm x 148 mm Up to 13 00 x 35 50 330 mm x 901 mm Paper Weights Cassettes 16 28 lb bond 60 106 g m Multipurpose Feeder 16 36 Ib bond 60 135 g m Media Handling Multipurpose Feeder 150 sheets oo Built in Paper Feeder 500 sheets Second Paper Feeder 500 sheets 1 4 Introduction and Installation FilmMaker 4 Std Std Opt Opt Std Std Std Std Opt Std Std Std Std Std Std Std Std Std Opt Media Types Plain and Laser Paper Std Heavy Paper Std Cover Std Transparencies Std Labels Std Envelopes Std Matte Film Std Clear Film Std Mirror Print Std Negative Print Std Tray Chaining Std XANTE Utilities PC and Macintosh Std Internal IDE Hard disk Opt Font Accelerator Std Fuser Temperature Control Std EP1 Toner Control Std Halftone Calibration Technology Gamma Std Enhanced Screening Technology Std Accurate Calibration Technology X ACT patented Std Densitometer Support Std NEIT Negative Enhanced Imaging Technology patented Opt Requires optional internal hard drive co Plain paper capaci
177. inter off and then back on To remove all fonts downloaded to a hard disk reinitialize the disk by downloading the Initdsk ps file 000 PC Setup 3 83 3 84 PC Setup Chapter 4 Configuration Introduction This chapter describes configuring printer features including manual settings available through the front panel and advanced features available through PPD options You also can configure the printer using XANTE browser utilities for browser details see Using the Browser Feature Access in chapter 2 Macintosh or chapter 3 PC RY PPD options override printer default settings for a specific job or for all jobs sent to mA the printer from your host Front Panel The printer s front panel provides printer status information and allows you to configure some printer features fig 4 1 Adobe PostScript 3 FilmMaker ONLINE READY DATA MANUAL DUPLEX FORM FEED e EST TRAY ONLINE SELECT e DUPLEX ENTER MENU Fig 4 1 Printer Front Panel Window The printer s front panel window displays configuration menu options and messages The messages indicate printer status request operator help and relay error or service information fig 4 1 Status Lights Printer front panel status lights or LEDs Light Emitting Diodes indicate printer status fig 4 1 Configuration 4 1
178. ion Drivers section p Even if you are installing this printer to a Network you must first install as a Parallel N Connection This is to ensure you can configure the printer s IP address Subnet address and Gateway address Q NOTE c Click OK if you chose an application in step 3b when a window appears asking if you want to continue click Yes The Copy Files window appears fig 3 7 Fig 3 7 Copy Files Window Fig 3 8 Language Preference Window PC Setup 3 5 4 Review the application destination folder s if applicable fig 37 then click Yes The Language Preference window appears fig 3 8 5 Select the appropriate language fig 3 8 then click OK The Adobe PostScript Printer program launches and the Adobe Welcome window appears fig 3 9 ML bodi AAA SC ih ae Dh Ba F gi mum S ACRI HIS ie a a im chek aux ri recen Fig 3 9 Adobe Welcome Window Fig 3 10 License Agreement Window y After you click Next Windows launches the Adobe PostScript Printer Driver setup sA program This may take a few moments 6 Read the Adobe Welcome Window fig 3 9 then click Next The Adobe License window appears fig 3 10 7 Read the license agreement fig 3 9 then click Accept The Printer Connection Type window appears fig 3 11 Fig 3 11 Printer Connection Type Window 8 Select the type of printer connection you want to setup fig 3 11 then click Next 3 6 PCSetu
179. ions Printer Descriptions folder on your Macintosh Configuring the PPD 1 Select Chooser from the Apple menu The Chooser window appears fig 2 41 Fig 2 41 Chooser Window Fig 2 42 Select AdobePS 2 Select AdobePS from the box on the left top left in a network environment a list of available printers appears to the right y If the printer does not appear in the list verify that L NOTE the printer is on and cable connections are secure your system is configured for EtherTalk see Configuring EtherTalk earlier in this chapter e your Macintosh is setup for EtherTalk in the AppleTalk Control panel 3 Highlight your printer and click Create If the setup reminder dialog box appears click OK The Adobe PostScript printer driver automatically selects and configures the correct PPD for your printer If multiple PPDs are installed for your printer select the correct PPD when prompted 4 Close the Chooser window to complete the PPD setup unless the Autosetup Failed message window appears fig 2 43 If this window appears continue with step 5 2 18 Macintosh Setup Lairenr Palri eagle ik FEE ete a r Inu ia Cee Upper igtere Try Fw nies 4 Lepe Captiigreat Dewy tari Emil end Tiras api rwerr ied lee a Peto ebem Le 1j Inlaid ewe araki Viren ore xz Fig 2 43 Autosetup Failed Message Fig 2 44 Installable Options Window 5 Click Ok fig 2 43 The Instal
180. ip ta Rap Fa nara erm 4 Introduction E 4 1 Pront Panel PME S SS 4 1 WY LINGLE A 4 1 statas Lis MiS noan RR e AERA NEP EP PPP 4 1 unu Fe P X B 4 2 Conic ran onm Menus gers ccs coves anaes esa eee E ee Ee E EE ee e EET 4 3 Dele Clie Mena PUIG asee eaea eeaeee ea E eE E EEES 4 3 Rescbtmer to Ra tory Derat G eeaeee eere eE E EEE 4 4 NS CEN IT m 4 4 xii Level 2 Rese trma tetusnon tecigees Porte ese ivi eiTe PIU RESCUE 4 4 Menu S 2018 0 San Disque Disc DdDup Dr ds DEP MED Dd DD DD DNE 4 4 The PPD sued DOO cit eee 4 4 Selecting PPD Options Macintoshi a2 ue qot iba tkbor betta di be pad eite tatit trins 4 5 Selecting PPD Options Windows 98 and Me aisi ttetetie tatit to opti the 4 5 Selecting PPD Options Windows NT 2000 XDP iacent tonta 4 7 a aS ENT OE 4 8 Conbimming Printer FeatUre Siseseinte puc un Tap Qui Qu Ru NBN 4 9 Accurate Calibration Technology X ACT abet pa ec berger qe 4 9 Front Patel XACT ene aA ERARA testa te oix Dot eir Dota Seti Dots F gen 4 9 Accurate Screens smetat aee ch bebe cect E A EA E E dei ond 4 11 boi 2 7 4 11 Electrophotography EP I Toner Control a eeqidtee pi dieeee toris es bodie edite de 4 12 Past Imaging DRE 4 12 Font Accelerat t utet eio DRE REO d eb RE HG HEEL EREMO LRL 3 4 12 F s r TempetatUte M
181. iphonal Tres Latia V Hrafsi T ugs bs E XANT Advanced Graphic Center T YA dei T T 2a os Tesio Supgod ed T od Fig 3 166 Advanced Graphics Center Fig 3 167 AGC Setup Window 2 Select your printer model and make necessary adjustments to paper trays paper sizes interface port and resolution settings according to your printer setup Then click either Linearize or More X ACT R When calibrating for plate you must select the manual feed tray by selecting the E2 Manual Feed Tray option in the AGC Setup Window Linearize To begin linearizing your printer you must first print a calibration page to measure the printer s current performance as a basis for the calibration A Always print the calibration page using the same media and toner or press ink as used m4 for the final copy When possible calibrate from the final output For example when calibrating for plates take the plate to press and print Then measure the output from the press NOTE You must use a densitometer capable of measuring dot area for the linearization process 1 Make sure the resolution which you will use to print the final output is selected in the AGC Setup window fig 3 167 under Resolution Supported PC Setup 3 75 2 Make sure that if you are calibrating for plate the Manual Feed Tray option is selected fig 3 167 3 Select Linearize fig 3 167 The Linearization window appears fig 3 168 Fineed Carved
182. isible laser beam which radiates inside the laser printer s scanner unit can cause permanent eye damage DO NOT disassemble or try to adjust the laser scanner unit FCC Classification Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment iii This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Shielded cables must be used with this unit to ensure compliance with the FCC Class A limits Power Information 100 120 V Version 100 120 VAC 90 132 V 50 60 Hz 47 63 Hz 6 5 A 220 240 V Version 220 240 VAC 198 264 V 50 60 Hz 47 63 Hz 3 2 A Power Cord The power cord is the main disconnect device It should be plugged into an easily accessible outlet For 115 Volt Configuration The power cord to be used with 115 Volt configuration is
183. it duse EE eE EN 5 5 Tecpel hie ICONS MT 5 5 TE ESAE Loeouien opta Dopo Dna mI EEE 5 6 Printing Double Sided Copy auper d Ped AM NAM bo Ms TAM UNM iu eeta 5 7 Manaa Double Sided COPY e esoescateteckbe obediens hon Erb edere d Be Di Ti iii 5 7 Printing with Various Media Types Las eiiebeu bi beue bete eu irito ibd tige 5 7 PEDES PII uester Eee EE EE ppp pb pP rd 5 7 Priming EHVEIDDSS Sono e P DU UIDU URS UU NA DUNEDIN 5 9 PE UEP oo DN 5 9 Printing Transparencies ark peni voL tide etd pod LL eoec boleto eet ieie a ERa 5 10 xiii Chapter 6 Maintenance and Specifications scsscssccesecesacesasenccedesseasssestease 6 1 ARMS HON bd E Mp Lcd IH Und Meo bo E lb daten AR du 6 1 Maintenance usn EHE NENNEN NUS aa aaa eeaeee 6 1 Handling the Printer eee i i ERGO E duin dui DU HE 6 1 Storing the DEIBUSPS p e He uen MIN RUN RI NIME 6 1 Moving the Printer accade e REX NER RN uut un 6 2 Cleanine the Printer Su HUE MEIMIRDMMUNHUPIIUPNINNPIOP 6 3 Puser Assembly edil Padres ban Ubi Ur Dia a UK EUN 6 3 Tranisicr Roller Cleaning uo noe He Hus TENIS GH HIM DH HEN 6 4 Toner and Manual Feed Area Cleaning 2er eir rH Ae vERN RR 6 5 MTG eS HD sectes ereet ne NNNM HH IM NEMINEM iE 6 6 Technical SpeciticatiohS ouo n usltasusuits up RURRUH RUD ERELE RUE VXEUF ROUTE ER VEL EU LEER K 6 7 Printer Memory Requirements 23 2 e ee ertt R CR er IPH EIE ECRIRE EE IEDA 6 8 Warranty and Service Options qecodr pri didapei ioo rddtoridnd rod d pd oda 6 9
184. ither through the front panel through a density dial through a browser or through all of these methods Printer Control Language A set of printer commands imbedded as software in the printer s controller which contains all the instructions needed by your printer to describe page content and character and graphic placement Printer Driver A file that enables the application program to communicate with the printer Usually the printer driver is installed within an application program Printer Margin Imageable area of the printer not the margin setting within an application The portion of a page to which a printer can apply toner is the imageable area of that page Protocol A set of rules used to control how data is sent between devices Queue In this manual s context the print jobs on the hard disk or RAM disk waiting to be printed RAM Random Access Memory RAM is volatile memory available to programs and documents Any information stored in RAM is lost when the computer s power is turned off RAM Disk A percentage of available RAM set aside to store data temporarily for faster system access Most XANTE printers allow you to specify a RAM disk to store fonts Raster Image An image composed of pixels or dots in a grid See Bitmapped Image and Vector Image Reboot In this manual s context a command which sends a PostScript file to the printer directing it to reload the system software Registration Exact alignm
185. ized Phillips head screw driver Container to hold parts removed from printer Small magnetized flat head screw driver An IDE hard disk upgrade installation involves Removing the controller board from the printer and housing Installing the IDE hard drive onto the controller board Reassembling the printer Removing the Controller Board 1 Access the controller board following the procedure in Removing the Controller Board Panel earlier in this chapter Use a magnetized screwdriver to remove the metal screws Be extremely careful not to drop any screws down into the printer s chassis This could cause damage to the printer which is not covered by the warranty In this case contact XANT Technical Support for information on retrieving the screw s 2 Remove the front panel cover A Do not touch any of the controller board circuitry handle it by its memory bank latches Options 7 7 a Squeeze the top cover latch to release the lock and then lift the top cover fig 7 9 the multipurpose feeder opens automatically as you open the top cover Then open the fuser cover fig 7 9 Fig 7 9 Open Top and Fuser Covers Fig 7 10 Remove Panel s Inside Screw b Remove the front panel s inside securing screw fig 7 10 then remove the front panel s rear securing screw fig 7 11 then lift the front panel cover up just enough to clear the printer and tilt the cover onto its left side fig 7 12 Fig 7 11 Re
186. job that the printer is processing take the printer off line and press the Reset key Test key allows you to scroll back through options on a menu level when using the configuration menus To print a start up page take the printer off 0 TEST line and press the Test key Then press the Online key Menu key allows you to enter the menu structure when Ready Idle or Offline appears in the window and to scroll forward through menus and MENU options Oe eh Enter key allows you to select the menu or option displayed in the window When you select an option an asterisk appears next to the option name in ENTER the window to indicate it is now the current setting pp See Interface Control later in this chapter for using the control keys to set the IP 2 A address Configuration Menus Use configuration menus to set printer features and interfaces defaults This section describes using the configuration menus The Menu Layout option in the front panel Utility Print menu prints a sheet with the main configuration menu structure and current option settings As you scroll through options in a menu an asterisk appears next to the option that is the current setting If necessary or desirable you can return to factory default settings see Resetting to Factory Defaults later in this chapter BG PPD options override printer default settings for a specific job or for all jobs sent to Ry Po mY the printer from your host Sel
187. lable Options window appears fig 2 44 6 Configure your printer s options fig 2 44 a Select Installed for any optional tray you have installed on your printer b Select the highest resolution on your printer and the amount of RAM installed on your printer 7 Click OK twice The Chooser window reappears then close that window See The PPD in chapter 4 for details on selecting PPD options Configuring Printer Options Various printer specific options become available through your software applications after you install the printer s PPD This section covers these options and their suggested settings RY Available options vary depending on the application For example Adobe PageMaker 6 AV a contains several options not available through other programs Printer Specific Options The following printer specific options are available in most applications Fast Imaging Adobe PostScript 3 s Fast Imaging feature allows you to select from two methods of image data compression for faster printing when image quality is not the primary concern Set Fast Imaging from your application Print dialog box None the factory default prints at normal speed and with no data compression Macintosh Setup 2 19 Optimized for Quality compresses image data for faster printing than normal but with some usually not noticeable loss of image quality Optimized for Speed implements a greater degree of data compression
188. lect Quality When speed is the more important select Speed but be aware that output quality may be slightly lower ANS Depending on the application used a Printer s Default option may be available When Ti this option is selected the current printer setting is used for the job Screen LPI The Screen LPI lines per inch feature allows you to control the number of gray levels and enhance the resolution quality of your printed image Usually you set lines per inch through your application However when LPI is not a software option you can use the Screen option provided by your printer s PPD in the Print dialog box Options include 30 LPI 75 LPI 85 LPI 95 LPI 110 LPI and 115 LPI KY Depending on the application used a Printer s Default option may be available When EM XA this option is selected the current printer setting is used for the job Screen Shape Dot Shapes The Screen Shape feature allows you to select the shape of dots that make up the screen pattern for your printed image This feature is controlled by your printer s PPD that is loaded on your system during printer setup Set the Screen Shape menu option in your application Print dialog box Options are Enhanced None the factory default Euclidean Round Line and Ellipse The choice of shape depends on the type of print job For example round usually is used for traditional offset printing while screen printers may choose line or ellipse NOTE
189. lecting features Windows NT 4 7 PPD menus 4 8 Accurate Screens menu 4 11 Enhanced Screens menu 4 21 Fast Imaging menu 2 19 3 13 4 12 Gamma menu 4 13 Media Weight menu 2 21 3 14 4 17 Mirror Print menu 2 21 3 14 4 17 Negative Print menu 4 18 Resolution menu 4 20 Smooth Shading menu 2 22 3 16 4 20 Tray Switch menu 4 23 PPD options 4 3 4 5 Accurate screens 4 9 Enhanced screens 4 9 Fast imaging 4 9 Gamma 4 9 Mirror print 4 9 Resolution 4 9 Smooth shading 4 9 Tray switch 4 9 Print Blurred 8 9 Plugged 8 8 Repetitive defects 8 6 Smudged 8 8 Print density 2 52 2 55 3 57 3 60 G 8 Print density dial 4 22 Print dialog box Accurate screens 4 11 Enhanced screening 4 21 Fast imaging 2 19 3 13 4 12 Media weight 2 21 3 14 4 17 Mirror print 2 21 3 15 4 17 Negative print 4 18 Resolution 4 20 Smooth shading 2 22 3 16 4 20 Tray selection 4 24 Tray switching 4 25 Print menu 4 25 Utility pages 4 25 Print quality 8 5 Printer Back view 1 8 Configuration Macintosh 2 36 Configuration menus 4 3 Configuration PC 3 42 Cross ship exchange 6 9 Density dial 4 23 Diagnostic tests 1 16 Dimensions 6 7 Engine speed 2 61 3 65 Environment 6 7 Index l 11 Firmware revision 2 61 3 65 Front panel 4 1 Front panel keys 4 2 Front panel lights 4 1 Front panel window 4 1 Front view 1 8 General information 2 61 3 65 Handling 6 1 Inside view 1 8 Interfaces 1 4 Language 6 7 Lifting 6 1 Location 1 6 Maintenance 6 1 M
190. lex LED 4 2 E Electrophotography 2 52 Electrophotography EP1 4 12 End of file marker 3 42 Engine speed 1 4 2 61 3 65 6 7 Enhanced screening 1 5 Enhanced Screening Technology 4 21 Enhanced screening technology 6 8 G 3 Enhanced screens PPD option 4 9 Enhanced Screens menu 4 21 Enter key 4 3 Envelopes 5 3 Cassette 5 5 Formatting 5 9 Printing 5 9 Printing tips 5 9 To avoid 5 1 Environment printer 6 7 EPI 1 5 2 52 3 57 EP1 Toner level 4 12 Ethernet G 3 Connection 2 1 Port 1 18 3 1 Printer not responding 8 4 TCP IP protocol 4 15 Ethernet port 2 1 EtherTalk 2 2 2 39 2 62 3 66 G 3 Configuration 2 39 Configuring 2 1 Network 2 1 Protocol 4 15 Setting the zone name Macintosh 2 37 Setting the zone name PC 3 43 Zone name 2 2 EtherTalk configuration 3 46 EtherTalk information page 2 63 EtherTalk zone 2 56 F Factory defaults 2 56 G 3 Factory ps 2 36 Resetting 4 4 Factory reset Level 1 4 4 Level 2 4 4 Factory ps 2 36 Fast imaging 2 19 3 13 4 12 PPD option 4 9 Fast Imaging menu 2 19 3 13 4 12 Fax phone number 8 21 FCC compliance iii Feature access Advanced Graphics Center 3 74 Browser 2 37 3 43 CD ROM 2 34 PostScript files 3 41 Without browser 3 74 Features 4 9 Accurate screens 4 9 4 11 Dot shape 4 21 Enhanced screening 4 21 Enhanced screens 4 9 Fast imaging 2 19 3 13 4 9 4 12 Font Accelerator 4 12 Gamma 4 9 Hard disk 4 14 Interface control 4 15 Jam recover 4 15 Language options 4 16 Medi
191. lling Eh protec Ep view lhe ralia licensing ininrmatean Fig 2 56 Select Appropriate Country 2 26 Macintosh Setup 3 Select the country fig 2 56 then click OK The Adobe License Agreement window appears fig 2 57 ae Ts Pes nud wan ar Ce ee EUER PEU p SEEEN I BDE L Y t STEN SAN PLS EE EYEE M uj MA a a M FU Se a a a uu SY LAP PEE Gp et r srry um Pit Pb Ea ey Rei debi LAE Kx Ri Lente M Lp ione i H 1x QUEE ea TR e Fig 2 57 License Agreement Window Fig 2 58 Adobe Type Manager Window 4 Read the license agreement fig 2 57 then click Accept The Adobe Type Manager window appears fig 2 58 5 Click Continue fig 2 58 The Read Me window appears fig 2 59 hay beta eet eee ee ht ee HE Tenir ima ham the pep mrem and hee bab ihr Eemer butun ia rye Ae s rpi pipe er ka u msi hp ee ee UR Ua a n LE GU ERA Gas mn SONIS Ca A Ce Fig 2 59 Read Me Window Fig 2 60 ATMInstall Window 6 Read the Adobe Read Me window then click Continue The ATMInstall window appears fig 2 60 Macintosh Setup 2 27 7 Select the desired type of ATM installation from the drop down menu at the top left fig 2 60 Easy Install installs the Adobe Type Manager and all related files Custom allows you to select just installing ATM or also installing ATM Language Support KY To remove ATM and all related files select Remove fig 2 60 the Install button oy con
192. lls in after running through the FilmStar 4 If your printer has the NEIT feature check the NEIT setting and adjust it if necessary See Negative Enhanced Imaging Technology NEIT in chapter 4 If your printer has a print density dial check its setting and lower it if necessary See Adjusting Print Density in chapter 4 The final output is not dark enough after it runs through the FilmStar 4 If your printer has a print density dial check its setting and raise it if necessary See Adjusting Print Density in chapter 4 If your printer has the NEIT feature check the setting to see if it is too high and adjust it if necessary See Negative Enhanced Imaging Technology NEIT in chapter 4 FilmStar Solution may need to be changed See the FilmStar 4 User s Guide Be sure that you use only Myriad Film and the correct XANTE FilmStar 4 Solution for your printer in the FilmStar 4 Use FilmStar 4 FX Solution with FilmMaker 4 printers The printer s toner may be low or bad Change the toner cartridge and run the job again See Removing and Installing the Toner Cartridge in chapter 1 Mechanical Issues This section provides tips for resolving problems with the printer s mechanical setup Troubleshooting 8 11 My printer is making funny noises Make sure the printer is set up on a stable level surface See Printer Location in chapter 1 Make sure the multipurpose feeder cover is closed firm
193. loaded in the printer s paper cassette and the cassette is selected as the media source 2 Press the Menu key until SETUP GRAPHIC appears Then press the Enter key 3 Press the Menu key until GRAPHIC XACT appears Then press the Enter key 4 Press the Menu key until TEST PAGE appears Then press the Enter key A page prints with 2 lines Line A and Line B The measurement listed by each line is the desired length for that line on that media size In this example Tabloid size 11 x 17 257 mm x 431 mm media is used Line A should be 251 46 mm and Line B should 388 61 mm 5 Measure Line A Use the following procedures to adjust the printer for the correct line length a Note the amount Line A is over or under 251 46 mm b Press the Menu key until LINE A appears Then press the Enter key Press the Menu key until the amount which would most closely adjust the line to the desired length appears Then press the Enter key For example if Line A is 250 46 mm instead of 251 46 mm select 1 00 mm to add one mm to make the line the correct length 6 Measure Line B Use the following procedures to adjust the printer for the correct line length a Note the amount Line B is over or under 388 61 mms b Press the Menu key until LINE B appears Then press the Enter key c Press the Menu key until the amount which would most closely adjust the line to the desired length appears Then press the Enter key For e
194. lution 7 1 Configuring 2 19 Controller board upgrades 7 4 Densitometer support 4 13 Enhanced Screening Technology 4 21 Graphic Software Package 4 9 4 13 4 21 Halftone Calibration Technology 4 13 IDE hard disk 7 7 Installed 2 65 Memory 7 5 Memory upgrade 7 6 Paper cassette 1 7 Paper feeder 7 1 PPD 4 4 Printer specific 2 19 4 4 RAM 7 1 Resolution 7 14 Tray setting 3 17 X ACT 4 9 Orientation Landscape G 5 Portrait G 7 OS 9 2 11 2 14 OS X 2 3 Overview Back of printer 1 8 Front of printer 1 8 Index l 9 Inside of printer 1 8 Ozone iii P Page count 2 61 3 65 PageMaker 2 74 2 75 PPD Macintosh 2 75 Paper 2 60 5 3 Coated 5 1 G 2 Curl 5 1 Media weight 2 21 3 14 4 17 Perforated 5 1 Sizes 1 4 1 11 1 13 Weights 1 11 1 13 Paper cassette 5 5 Capacity 1 11 Optional 1 7 Standard 1 7 Paper feeder 5 5 7 1 Optional cassette 7 1 Selecting 4 23 Tray chaining 5 6 Paper handling options 7 1 Paper jam status message 8 2 Paper Mode menu 4 19 Paper out status message 8 2 Paper path 8 13 Dirty 8 6 Parallel 2 62 3 7 3 66 G 7 Cable 1 18 3 1 Connection PC 3 1 Port 1 18 Printer not responding 8 3 Parallel information page 2 64 Parallel settings 2 62 3 66 Parameter G 7 Parameters Persistent G 7 Volatile G 11 Parmdump ps 2 37 3 43 Partial prints 8 6 Password Changing 2 68 3 72 Setting 2 67 3 71 l 10 Index PC Utilities PDFs folder 3 41 PS_Files folder 3 42 PDF 2 23 G 7 Installing 2 74 QuarkXPress
195. ly Make sure all paper cassettes are seated properly See Standard Cassette in chapter 1 There may be a foreign object in the printer Turn off the printer and remove the object See chapter 1 for the basic printer setup and chapter 7 for the optional paper feeder setup I can t remove the paper cassette Do not remove the cassette by force Make sure you are using the proper procedure to remove the paper cassette See Standard Cassette in chapter 1 The cassette may be jammed This can occur if the power switch is turned off or the multipurpose feeder opened during printing Turn off the printer and wait a few seconds Turn on the printer and wait for the Ready Idle message then try to remove the cassette Media Jams This section contains suggestions for solving Media jams Preventing Jams Use the following guidelines to prevent most media jams Make sure the media is level and in an appropriate location See Printer Location in chapter 1 Make sure media meets the guidelines in Media Specifications in chapter 5 Make sure media is stored following the guidelines in Media Specifications in chapter 5 Make sure media is loaded properly in the selected cassette or multipurpose feeder Make sure the correct size media is loaded in the selected cassette or multipurpose feeder 6 12 Troubleshooting Follow the guidelines for the type of media you are using See Media Types in c
196. main during the current power cycle See Managing Fonts later in this chapter Download Postscript File This option allows you to select a PostScript file and send it to the printer Special Menu The Special menu allows you to check printer status and manage fonts downloaded to your printer Printer Status This option allows you to check current printer status Printer Font Directory The Printer Font Directory provides access to fonts downloaded to the printer Using this menu you can print a list or view on screen all fonts downloaded to printer ROM memory or an optional hard disk Delete allows you to remove fonts that have been downloaded to memory or the optional hard disk You cannot remove fonts from ROM See Managing Fonts later in this chapter Macintosh Setup 2 35 Other Special Menu Options We recommend that you manually reboot your printer or use your system Special Restart option instead of using the Clear Font Cache or Restart Printer options in the Special menu See the PostScript Reference Language Manual about the Use Different Password option PS Files Folder The PS Files folder on the XANTE Utilities CD ROM contains Adobe PostScript files These files can help you in such areas as keeping track of your printer s status performing specific functions and printing font samples Use Adobe Downloader to download these files to your printer see Using Adobe Downloader earlier in this chapter
197. matically loads the most recently used fonts from the printer s optional hard disk into the RAM disk This eliminates time usually required to access fonts from the hard disk AccelaFont is active only if fonts are downloaded to an optional hard disk on the printer and RAM Disk is enabled for 1 MB or more Options are 0 through 100 the factory default in 10 increments R You also can set this feature using the front panel Utility Font Accel configuration gt 4 menu 1 Goto the printer home page fig 2 93 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details NOTE 2 42 Macintosh Setup Fig 2 93 Printer Home Page Fig 2 94 AccelaFont Window 2 Select Printer Configuration PostScript AccelaFont fig 2 93 The AccelaFont window appears fig 2 94 3 Select the desired percent of RAM Disk to allocate for AccelaFont from the Percentage drop down menu fig 2 94 Options are 096 to 10096 the factory default in 1096 increments 4 Click Change Then close your browser DPI DPI allows you to set the printer s default DPI 1 Goto the printer home page fig 2 95 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 2 95 Printer Home Page Fig 2 96 Set Default DP Window 2 Select Printer Configuration PostScript DIP fig 2 95 The Default DPI window appears fig 2 96 Macintosh Setup 2 43 3 Select the desired DPI for your printer from the Default DPI drop down
198. media jam has occurred along the paper path caused by media reaching a position earlier than expected The FIFO SIMM or SODIMM is not present is not properly inserted or is broken There is a hardware problem with the fuser There is an error with the fuser such as a temperature inaccuracy There is a hardware problem with the laser There is a hardware problem with the motor A media jam has occurred after the media has been printed but before it has been deposited in the output tray Appears when the printer is first turned on before the initialization process begins The multipurpose feeder cover is open A media jam has occurred caused by the media not being pulled from the tray properly The output tray is full The fuser cover is not closed properly Troubleshooting 8 1 HOLDING INITIALIZING LATE PAPER JAM LOW PAPER LOW TONER NO TONER CART OFFLINE PAPER JAM PAPER OUT PROCESSING READY FONT ACCEL READY IDLE READY PRINTING RESET 1 RESETTING JOB TEST PRINT 6 2 Troubleshooting The printer is offline and data is coming across one or more of the interfaces The printer cannot receive the data when it is offline The printer is warming up and performing setup routines A media jam has occurred caused by the media not reaching the exit roller at the correct time The media stack is low in the selected cassette The message appears during each media feed when the medi
199. menu fig 2 96 Standard options are 600 x 600 DPI and 1200 x 1200 DPI if the 2400 dpi upgrade is installed on your printer then 2400 x 2400 DPI also appears in the drop down menu 4 Click Change Then close your browser R You also can select the DPI through the printer s front panel See Resolution Options sA DPI in chapter 4 for details Linearization Linearization allows you to create and download custom curves to your printer Seven different custom gamma curves can be created using this process You must use a densitometer capable of measuring dot area for the linearization process Y A densitometer like any other precision instrument must be calibrated before each use Refer to your densitometer s documentation for instructions on calibrating and using the densitometer NOTE g 1 Goto the printer home page fig 2 97 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details as a si MERE cues Fig 2 97 Printer Home Page Fig 2 98 Linearization Window 2 Select Printer Configuration PostScript Linearization fig 2 97 The Linearization window appears fig 2 98 2 44 Macintosh Setup 3 Linearize your printer using the following procedure fig 2 98 a Select the number of the custom gamma curve which you want to create from the Custom Gamma drop down menu Options are 0 through 6 the factory default is 0 Then click Change b Select the input source for printing the calib
200. menus 4 16 Media types Cover 4 16 Heavy paper 4 16 Labels 4 16 Transparency 4 16 Media Weight menu 2 21 4 17 Memory 1 4 6 8 7 5 Installed 2 23 3 17 Requirements 6 8 6 9 ROM G 9 Third party 7 5 Upgrade 7 6 Virtual 2 52 3 57 Menu key 4 3 Menu Layout 2 69 Menu Layout page 4 26 Menus configuration 4 3 Midtone dot G 6 Mirror image G 6 Mirror print 1 5 G 6 PPD option 4 9 Mirror Print menu 2 21 3 14 4 17 More X ACT 2 42 2 50 3 48 6 8 Advanced Graphics Center 3 80 Moving the printer 6 2 Multipurpose feeder Add paper prompt 1 15 Capacity 1 13 5 5 Loading media 5 5 Media sizes 4 17 5 5 Myriad film G 6 Ordering 5 8 Part numbers 5 8 Sizes 5 8 Static 5 8 To order 5 8 N NDPS 3 31 Negative Enhanced Imaging Technology 4 18 G 6 Negative print 1 5 G 6 PPD option 4 9 Negative Print menu 4 18 NEIT 1 5 2 52 2 54 3 57 3 59 4 18 7 1 8 11 G 6 Netduplex ps 2 36 Netpgoff ps 2 36 3 42 Netpgon ps 2 37 3 43 Network G 6 General configuration 2 40 Network class 4 15 Network mask 4 15 Network menu DHCP 4 15 Gateway menu 4 15 IP address 4 15 Net Class 4 15 Net Mask menu 4 15 Network page 2 38 2 68 3 45 Network protocol 2 62 3 66 Network settings 2 41 3 47 Browser 3 47 Noise level 6 7 Notes 1 3 O Off line status message 8 2 On site service 6 10 Online key 4 2 Online support 2 33 Online Ready LED 4 2 Optimize output for 2 22 Optimized Output for 3 15 Options 2400 DPI reso
201. mm idle Fi L Bauer lim Lad aj T Emilin ride dcm Tm Fig 3 168 Linearization Window 4 Change the Linearization window LPI setting in the Print box fig 3 168 to achieve 256 levels of gray for the resolution at which you are printing For 600 dpi select 85 lpi for 1200 dpi select 106 lpi Any lpi may be used measure the lpi that is to be used for the final output ES 5 Print a Calibration Page to measure the printer s current performance as a basis for the calibration To do this use the following procedure Always print the calibration page using the same media and toner or press ink as used for the final copy Also when possible calibrate from the final output For example when calibrating for plates take the plate to press and print Then measure the output from the press 25 a Select Emulsion side down if you want to print a mirror image The printed calibration page will still look like a positive but the patch box values will be reversed b Select the custom Gamma Curve you want to update from the Update Transfer Curve list This curve selection automatically updates the LPI option to match the lpi listed for the selected curve To select a different Ipi setting use the LPI option and scroll to the desired setting RU If you select a custom lpi for a listed curve the lpi listed in front of the curve s name m z E in the Update Transfer Curve box does not change to match the new lpi I
202. move Panel s Rear Screw Fig 7 12 Lift and Tilt Front Panel Cover and Disconnect Display Cable c Disconnect the display cable by gently pulling it out of its connector fig 7 12 3 Press down on the front side cover s two top hooks lift the cover slightly to release its two bottom tabs then pull the cover out from the printer fig 7 13 7 8 Options Fig 7 13 Remove Front Side Cover Fig 7 14 Remove Assembly Securing Screws 4 Remove the controller assembly a Remove the six screws numbered fig 7 14 securing the controller assembly to the printer s left side b Remove the power cord ferrite if one is attached by opening its side latch and lifting it off the cord fig 7 15 Fig 7 15 Remove Ferrite if Necessary Fig 7 16 Disconnect Controller Power Cord c Disconnect the controller power cord by pulling it gently straight out from the controller board fig 7 16 d Ease the controller assembly out of the printer fig 7 17 freeing the video connector from its socket Make sure to slide the power cord down and out through the cord opening in the bottom of the controller assembly Options 7 9 Fig 7 17 Remove Controller Assembly 5 Remove the controller board from its housing a Locate and remove the seven screws numbered fig 7 18 securing the controller board to the controller housing Fig 7 18 Remove Screws Securing Board Fig 7 19 Remove Board from Housing b Liftthe board away f
203. moves to the next number to the left of the current number flashing Enter key accepts new address if valid and returns to Network Ipaddr menu The menu will display a message if the address entered is invalid TE Ri You must turn the printer off and restart it for the new IP address to take effect A e z Check with your System Supervisor for the correct settings Net Class Use the front panel Net Class Network Net Class configuration and front panel keys to select the network class setting Menu options include Class A Class B and Class C the factory default Check with your System Supervisor for the correct class DHCP Use the front panel DHCP Network DHCP configuration menu and front panel keys to select the DHCP setting Menu options are Yes to enable the factory default and No to disable this feature Check with your System Supervisor for the correct DHCP setting Jam Recover The Jam Recover feature reprints the last page processed after a paper jam is cleared Configuration 4 15 Set Jam Recover from the Utility Jam Recovery configuration menu Options are On to enable and Off the factory default to disable this feature R If you must turn off the printer to clear a paper jam Jam Recover is not effective EmA because all print job information in RAM is lost Language Options Language options allow you to select the language for the printer s front panel window Set the display language from the U
204. n Printer Information options allow you to access printer diagnostic general I O setting and installed option information 1 Goto the printer home page fig 3 137 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 3 137 Printer Home Page Fig 3 138 Printer Information Options 3 64 PC Setup 2 Select Printer Configuration Printer Information fig 3 137 Printer Information Options appear fig 3 138 Diagnostic Information The Diagnostic Information option allows you to check your printer s E Prom s status 1 Go to the printer home page fig 3 139 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 3 139 Printer Home Page Fig 3 140 Diagnostic Information Window 2 Select Printer Information Diagnostic Information fig 3 139 The Diagnostic Information window appears fig 3 140 3 Check the right side of the window fig 3 140 to determine the condition of your printer s E Prom A If the E Prom condition is good you don t have to do anything if it is bad or missing mY contact XANT Technical support NOTE 4 Close your browser General Information The General Information option lists miscellaneous printer details These include the product name PostScript version current firmware revision boot RAM version RAM size engine speed page count and PostScript margin settings as well as whether the start up page and low toner page printing is enabled
205. n type the following substituting the correct IP address for lt IP ADDRESS gt for example if your IP address is 192 9 200204 you would type PING 192 9 200204 at the DOS prompt C PING IP ADDRESS gt J WY If you can ping the printer go on to step 10 If you cannot ping your printer contact N your Network Administrator NOTE 10 Go back to your Printer Properties fig 3 35 and select the Details Tab fig 3 36 Fig 3 35 Printer Properties Window Fig 3 36 Details Tab Window 11 Select Add Port from the Details tab fig 3 36 The Add Port window appears fig 3 37 12 Select Other and highlight XanteLPR fig 3 37 then click OK The Configure Port window appears fig 3 38 3 20 PC Setup me the pes od put pone edad Me ct 1 pmi Speckzfra creck path is a prar Gah Chik Ve pl pet pms rud Ke adt uuu 1 f a wi n E J Cancel Fig 3 87 Add Port Window Fig 3 38 Configure Port Window 13 Enter your printer s IP address and Queue name fig 3 38 then click OK 14 Click Apply when the Printer Properties window reappears fig 3 35 then click OK Installing AdobePS Printer Driver and Printer PPD Windows NT 2000 XP This section covers installing utilities setting up a parallel or network connection configuring a remote printer running in LPR mode and creating NDPS printers at the server console in a Windows NT 2000 or XP environment Installing Utilities This sectio
206. n EtherTalk network with more than one zone the network router assigns your printer a default zone Check with your System Administrator to determine the correct zone for your printer Then if necessary change the printer s zone name using the Setzone ps file and Adobe Downloader or the Set EtherTalk Zone option available through your browser See Using Adobe Downloader or see Network EtherTalk General and TCP IP later in this chapter Before Beginning Software Installation and Configuration Before you begin software installation and configuration be aware that installation depends on your Macintosh OS version Any classic Macintosh OS version not version X When the XANTE Utilities CD ROM is inserted into the computer the setup program starts or should start automatically 2 2 Macintosh Setup OSX The setup program will not start Click the CD ROM icon to open it then double click OSX_setup This provides a front end for the installers available to OS X Language Before beginning the software installation and configuration note that whenever you open the XANTE Utilities you need to make sure the appropriate language is selected You can select the language either in the Main Installation Window fig 2 2 or from the Language menu fig 2 3 Use the following procedure to select the language 1l Insert the XANT Utilities CD ROM into your Macintosh The Main Installation window should open automatically
207. n allows you to manually build Port Handler Queue Based Printer This option will re direct jobs to a NetWare queue PC Setup 3 31 Remote Printer RP SPX This allows you to create a PA to represent a printer running RP mode Remote Printer LPR TCP IP This option allows you to create a printer agent to represent a printer configured with LPR mode for TCP IP 10 Select Remote Printer LPR TCP IP Enter in the information requested 11 Accept and Exit the configuration Using the Remote Printer LPR TCPIP Option from the Server Console 1 Follow steps 1 8 in the previous procedure Creating NDPS Printers at the Server Console 2 Select Remote Printer LPR TCPIP from the connection type menu 3 Provide the information in the screen 4 Select Accept and then Exit This loads the Printer Agent with its associated Port Handler The Port Handler configuration is closed and you return to the NDPS Manager Installing Auxiliary Utilities This section contains installation instructions for Adobe Acrobat Reader Adobe Type Manager ATM and Advanced Graphics Center Adobe Acrobat Reader XANT Utilities CD ROM Documentation is in Adobe Acrobat Portable Documentation Format PDF Use Adobe Acrobat Reader included on the Utilities CD ROM to read this documentation To install Adobe Acrobat Reader 1l Insert the XANTE Utilities CD ROM into your PC XANT Utilities Installer should launch automatically If not select
208. n covers installing utilities on Windows NT 2000 XP based computers This process installs your printer s PPD and selected application PDFs or PPDs then it launches the Adobe PostScript Printer Driver installer XANT Utilities CD ROM Documentation is in Adobe Acrobat Portable Documentation Format PDF Use Adobe Acrobat Reader included on the utilities CD ROM to read this documentation See Adobe Acrobat Reader later in this chapter for details XANT Utilities Installer runs properly only on an Intel based computer system running Windows NT 2000 XP To load the Adobe PostScript printer drivers manually see the CD ROM s Readme pdf file and Installing Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers earlier in this chapter To load QuarkXPress PDFs manually see PDFs Folder later in this chapter To Install Utilities and Drivers Windows NT 2000 XP PC Setup 3 21 1l Insert the XANT Utilities CD ROM into your PC XANT Utilities Installer should launch automatically If not select Start Run Install xt prinst exe The XANT Utilities Main window appears fig 3 39 iret Hi rimperep WiL f imin ke z Dims aE ARE MI li Fig 3 39 XANT Utilities Main Window Fig 3 40 Installation Preferences Window 2 Click Install Printer fig 3 39 The Installation Preferences window appears fig 3 40 3 Make the following selections in the Installation Preferences window fig 3 40 a Select your printer
209. n the RAM SODIMM straight above its bank making sure the SODIMM s notches are positioned over the corresponding IDE board connector s notches b Lower the SODIMM straight down into its bank until the bank latches snap into place A Do not force a SODIMM into place If it does not go in easily realign it making sure its notches are positioned correctly then lower the SODIMM into place fig 7 8 5 Reassemble the printer following the procedure in Reinstalling the Controller Board Panel later in this chapter 7 6 Options Installing the IDE Hard Disk Upgrade The internal IDE hard disk upgrade provides extra space to store downloaded fonts and allows you to implement the Font Accelerator feature on your printer See Printer Options earlier in this chapter to order this upgrade See Font Accelerator in chapter 4 and Managing Fonts in chapter 2 Macintosh or 3 PC The IDE upgrade contains the following IDE hard disk 4 hexagon nylon stand off posts IDE ribbon cable 4 nylon screws A Static electricity can destroy the printer s electronic components Always use an antistatic procedure when working with the controller board Use an anti static wristband or touch an unpainted metal surface to eliminate static electricity before handling a circuit board When handling a board always hold it by the edges and avoid walking around particularly on carpeted surfaces Required Equipment Small magnet
210. n the multipurpose feeder and chapter 8 contains printing troubleshooting procedures Printing Film With XANT s optional patented NEIT you can print directly to XANTE s Myriad film to create an image for burning metal plates and silk screen emulsions bypassing camera and darkroom steps Myriad film is a specially designed film with low UV blockage The transmissive density of the toner on Myriad film is increased from 1 5 or 1 6 up to 3 0 to 3 3 when processed through FilmStar 4 Media Selecting Handling and Printing 5 7 Always use the multipurpose feeder when printing film Use only XANTE s Myriad Film clear or matte designed specifically for use with your printer and FilmStar 4 Using other film material may void your printer warranty Avoid handling film excessively to prevent fingerprints and scratches Keep the printer clean see chapter 6 for cleaning instructions Load up to 30 sheets of film or to a stack height of 70 18 mm Load fewer sheets if jams occur Remove each sheet as it prints to prevent static buildup Do not fan film This causes static buildup which can cause jams Once an image is printed on Myriad Film the toner side is the emulsion side For FilmStar 4 processing film loads emulsion side up fyou experience problems printing film see Film and FilmStar 4 Specific Issues in chapter 8 The following chart lists Myriad Film sizes To order Myriad Film call your pref
211. n this case you need to keep a record of the new lpi setting for that gamma curve 3 76 PC Setup c Select the resolution which you will use to print the final output in the printer front panel GRAPHIC DPI menu d Click Print Calibration Page fig 3 168 The calibration page shows the printer s performance using no gamma curve correction fig 3 169 y Print only one calibration page using the Print Calibration Page button at the A beginning of the calibration process Printing this page again later in the process resets the calibration cancelling any linearization you have already done E A a ee lca cn BHEHNENENSENHHER MNMEBENBENEENEBA EUEEEEBEENN BERBER RE Fig 3 169 Sample Calibration Page 6 Use your densitometer to get density measurements for the calibration page you printed Like any other precision instrument the densitometer must be calibrated before each use Refer to its documentation for instructions on calibrating and using the densitometer 7 Click Enter Curve Linearize fig 3 170 The Densitometer Data Entry window appears fig 3 171 PC Setup 3 77 ee o El uere seme Y Bk VR DOS e ee rd Die Fer Drm careo s ed coed Ton mr cmm Da da l E mm ar el paman baa mua Ec gov fames array s x ww m9 oia um aj Eje T Hepa a Fig 3 170 Linearization Window Fig 3 171 Densitometer Data Entry Window ace The XD 1 XANT densitometer comb
212. ned on See Turning the Printer On in chapter 1 Make sure the power source is grounded working and rated for 100 V 15 A The printer has power but no start up page prints Make sure the start up page feature is enabled See Start up Page in chapter 4 Check the front panel window for a status message See Status Messages earlier in this chapter Make sure the toner cartridge is installed properly See Toner Cartridge in chapter 1 Make sure there is media in the selected tray If you are using a paper cassette make sure it is installed properly See Standard Cassette and Multipurpose Feeder in chapter 1 My printer does not respond properly to my PC using a parallel connection Make sure all cables are connected and seated properly See Required Equipment Parallel in chapter 1 and Port Connections in chapter 3 Make sure the correct Adobe PostScript printer driver and your printer s PPD are installed and configured properly See Installing Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers in chapter 3 Make sure the printer is online Troubleshooting 8 3 My printer does not respond properly to my host using an Ethernet connection Make sure all cables are connected and seated properly See Port Connection Ethernet Port in chapter 2 Make sure the correct Adobe PostScript printer driver and your printer s PPD are installed and configured properly See Adobe PostScript Prin
213. ng printer setup Set the Screen Shape menu option in your application Print dialog box Options are Enhanced the factory default None Euclidean Round Line and Ellipse The choice of shape depends on the type of print job For example round usually is used for traditional offset printing while screen printers may choose line or ellipse z Ka Depending on the application being used a Printer s Default option may be available EE NM Smooth Shading Smooth Shading allows you to use the Adobe PostScript 3 method of rendering gradient blends Smooth Shading produces the highest quality image at the selected resolution For some images PostScript files created with Smooth Shading are smaller and print faster than those created using PostScript Level 2 Set Smooth Shading from your application Print dialog box Off the factory default disables this feature Options of Maximum High Medium Low are available Additional Printer Specific Options for Adobe PageMaker Several additional printer specific options are available through PageMaker s Printer Features in the Print dialog box They include TraySwitch Installed Memory and Optional Tray TraySwitch Tray Chaining TraySwitch allows you to select the printer s tray chaining feature on a per job basis Tray chaining on your printer is controlled via the printer s PPD Tray Switch feature Options are False the factory default which disables chaining and True which enables it Wh
214. ng the original program that created it The Printer Description File is a file that provides printer specific information needed by QuarkXPress versions prior to 4 0 to work smoothly with the printer Peripheral A piece of equipment or device connected to a computer For example printers modems and scanners are forms of peripheral devices Persistent Parameters Parameters which last even if the printer is powered off Pica Standard of measurement 1 6 inch 1 pica 6 picas 1 inch 72 points 1 inch Point Size Term used to describe a font s size One point equals 1 72 of an inch Port A receptacle on a computer or printer through which data can be sent or received Portrait Orientation A page format that is larger vertically than it is horizontally The term comes from painting when artists paint portraits on canvases that are taller than they are wide See also Landscape Orientation PostScript A page description language developed by Adobe Systems XANTE printers contain the Adobe Postscript language not an emulation PPD File PostScript Printer Description file A file which provides software applications access to printer specific features Options set using the PPD override printer default settings made from the front panel or through XANTE utilities Glossary G 7 Print Density The relative darkness or lightness of the print image on the page Depending upon the XANTE printer density can be changed e
215. nge 4 Close your browser You also can select the DPI through the printer s front panel See Resolution Options DPI in chapter 4 for details Linearization Linearization allows you to create and download custom curves to your printer Seven different custom gamma curves can be created using this process You must use a densitometer capable of measuring dot area for the linearization process WwW A densitometer like any other precision instrument must be calibrated before each use Refer to your densitometer s documentation for instructions on calibrating and using the densitometer NOTE aS 1 Goto the printer home page fig 3 105 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 3 105 Printer Home Page Fig 3 106 Linearization Window 2 Select Printer Configuration PostScript Linearization fig 3 105 The Linearization window appears fig 3 106 3 50 PC Setup 3 Linearize your printer using the following procedure fig 3 106 a Select the number of the custom gamma curve which you want to create from the Custom Gamma drop down menu Options are 0 through 6 the factory default is 0 Then click Change b Select the LPI that will achieve 256 levels of gray from the LPI drop down menu Options are from 5 LPI to 210 LPI in increments of 1 the factory default is 85 LPI KY For 600 dpi select 85 lpi for 1200 lpi select 106 lpi for 2400 lpi select 133 to 150 Ipi A Any
216. ning window informs you that formatting the disk will erase everything on it If you want to continue click Proceed With Format if not skip to step 4 fig 3 130 n Fig 3 130 Warning Window 4 Close your browser To display RAM disk settings and configure the device 1 Goto the printer home page fig 3 131 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 3 131 Printer Home Page Fig 3 132 RAM Disk Settings Window 2 Select Printer Configuration Storage Devices RAM Disk fig 3 131 The RAM Disk Settings window appears fig 3 132 showing current settings If you want to change the capacity setting continue to step 3 to reformat the RAM disk device skip to step 4 Otherwise skip to step 5 3 Select the desired capacity setting from the Capacity drop down menu Then if you want to reformat the RAM disk device continue to step 4 Otherwise skip to step 5 3 62 PC Setup 4 Click Format a warning window informs you that formatting the disk will erase everything on it If you want to continue click Proceed With Format if not skip to step 5 5 Close your browser Then reboot your printer to make the change take effect Trays and Media Input Trays and Media Types The Trays and Media option allows you to select your default input tray and media types Default Input Tray The Default Input Tray option allows you to select your default input tray l Go to the p
217. not be pulled completely out of the toner cartridge Remove the cartridge and pull out the tape See Toner Cartridge in chapter 1 Media comes out of the printer creased or crumpled Media may be damp or otherwise damaged Make sure the media meets the requirements in Media Specifications in chapter 5 If necessary replace the media See Standard Cassette and Multipurpose Feeder in chapter 1 Media may be loaded improperly Make sure it is loaded print side up Print is smudged or small spaces are plugged Media may be damp or otherwise damaged Make sure the media meets the requirements in Media Specifications in chapter 5 If necessary replace the media See Standard Cassette and Multipurpose Feeder in chapter 1 The toner cartridge may need replacing See Toner Cartridge in chapter 1 Vertical blanks appear on my image or text P int T P int or P int or P int or 6 8 Troubleshooting The toner cartridge may not be installed properly Reinstall it See Toner Cartridge in chapter 1 The toner cartridge may need replacing See Toner Cartridge in chapter 1 Print is blurred on the output Printer The density setting may need adjusting See Adjusting Print Density in chapter 4 The toner cartridge may need replacing See Toner Cartridge in chapter 1 Bold print appears shaded on the output The density setting may need adju
218. ns 6 7 Technical support 2 8 2 10 8 21 Fax number 8 21 Internet 8 22 Phone number 8 21 Web page 8 22 Temperature Fuser 2 53 3 57 Fuser control 1 5 Media storage 6 2 Warming up status message 8 3 Test key 4 3 Test print status message 8 2 Timeout menu printer 4 19 Tint G 10 Toner Bleeds 8 10 Control 1 5 2 52 Density 2 55 3 60 EP1 2 52 Flakes 8 10 Low toner page 2 38 3 45 4 25 Reorder low toner page 4 25 Smears 8 7 Warning 1 9 Toner bleed 4 19 Toner cartridge 6 8 Caution 1 8 Control 4 22 Coverage 6 8 Density dial 4 23 Disposal 1 9 During printer moves 6 2 Handling 1 8 Redistributing toner 4 22 Sealing tape 8 8 Transfer level EP1 4 12 Troubleshooting 8 3 Warning 1 10 Toner Page menu 4 23 Toning G 10 Trademarks ii Transfer curve G 10 Transfer roller 6 4 Transmission protocol G 10 Transparencies 2 60 5 3 Fanning 5 10 Jams 5 10 Media weight 2 21 3 14 4 17 Printing 5 10 Trapping G 10 Tray Default input tray 2 58 Optional 2 23 3 17 Selecting 4 24 Tray chaining 1 5 2 23 3 16 4 24 5 6 Tray select key 4 2 4 24 Tray switch PC menu 4 9 PPD option 4 9 Tray Switching menu 4 23 Trays and media 2 58 2 59 TraySwitch 2 23 3 16 Troubleshooting Black dots 8 5 Black page 8 7 Blank areas 8 8 Blank page 8 7 Blurred print 8 8 8 9 Bold print shaded 8 9 Cables 8 3 8 4 Dark image 2 20 8 4 Detail lost 8 4 Ethernet 8 4 Ethernet connection 8 4 Film scratches 8 10 Funny noises 8 12 Gamma 2 20 Horiz
219. nstallation 6 Insert the pins on both sides of the cartridge into the guide channels in the printer fig 1 12 Then slide the cartridge into the printer until it stops and is seated properly fig 1 13 Fig 1 13 Insert Toner Cartridge Fig 1 14 Close Top Cover 7 Close the top cover by pressing down on the center section until the latch engages fig 1 14 Then close the multipurpose feeder fig 1 15 Fig 1 15 Close Multipurpose Feeder Standard Cassette The standard universal paper cassette feeds up to 500 sheets of 20 Ib bond 60 Ib text weight 65 g m paper or other paper to a stack height of 2 13 54 mm This cassette can handle media weights from 16 28 Ib 60 to 105 g m An optional envelope cassette designed to feed up to 75 envelopes is available for your printer This section describes loading and installing the standard paper cassette Chapter 5 covers media types and sizes for use in the paper cassettes and available optional cassettes Chapter 7 describes installing optional paper feeders A Make sure all media used meets the guidelines in Media Specifications in chapter 5 Introduction and Installation 1 11 1 Remove the cassette if it is in the printer by pulling the cassette straight out until it stops fig 1 16 Then lift it slightly and pull it from the printer fig 1 17 Fig 1 16 Pull Out Cassette Fig 1 17 Remove Cassette from Printer 2 Place the cassette on a flat su
220. on or disabled off PC Setup 3 65 1 Go to the printer home page fig 3 141 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 3 141 Printer Home Page Fig 3 142 General Information Window 2 Select Printer Information General Information fig 3 141 The General Information window appears fig 3 142 3 Check the desired printer information fig 3 142 then close your browser I O Settings The I O settings option has four sub options AppSocket EtherTalk IP IPP LPR Parallel and USB each of which displays current printer settings for its network protocol 1 Goto the printer home page fig 3 143 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 3 143 Printer Home Page Fig 3 144 I O Settings Window 2 Select Printer Information I O Settings fig 3 143 The I O Settings window appears fig 3 144 3 66 PC Setup 3 Select the desired protocol AppSocket EtherTalk IP IPP LPR Parallel or USB fig 3 144 then check its settings a The AppSocket Information Page fig 3 145 lists On Type Enabled Interpreter PrinterControl and OutputDevice settings Fig 3 145 AppSocket Information Page Fig 3 146 EtherTalk Information Page b The EtherTalk Information Page fig 3 146 lists On Type Enabled HasNames Interpreter EtherTalkType EtherTalkZone EthernetAddress DelayedOutputClose Printer Controller OutputDevice and Filtering settings
221. on window appears fig 2 163 Lad Fi ied ee rede PPP eed dl Cs SAT Piae NATER Prater imines EAE PITE Het d Bm BUNT Frin Cana eem O l mim Ca Fig 2 163 PPD Configuration Window Fig 2 164 Installable Options Window 3 Select Configure fig 2 163 The printer s Installable Options window appears fig 2 164 4 Select the appropriate upgrade from the corresponding drop down menu fig 2 164 For example if you installed 2400 dpi upgrade select 2400 DPI from the Resolution Option drop down menu 5 Click Ok Then close the Chooser window when it reappears Now the PPD is configured for the new resolution 2400 dpi will be available through your applications Adobe Web Site Access You can use your printer utilities to access the Adobe Systems web site to check for updates such as new versions of ATM and plug ins or to download files To do this use the Web menu or the Adobe Downloads option in the Web Information drop down menu on the Main Installation window Macintosh Setup 2 73 1l Insert the XANTE Utilities CD ROM into your Macintosh The main Installation window should open automatically fig 2 165 If not double click the CD ROM icon then double click the Setup icon i LaS i TT hea oh EAA Fig 2 165 Main Installation Window Fig 2 166 Web Menu 2 Select Adobe Downloads from the Web Information drop down menu fig 2 165 or select it from the Web menu fig 2 1
222. ontal banding 8 9 Jam recovery 4 15 Jams 8 12 Labels 5 9 Light output 8 11 Mechanical issues 8 11 Media creased 8 8 Media crumpled 8 8 Missing characters 8 6 No power 8 3 Paper cassette 8 12 Parallel connection 8 3 Partial prints 8 6 Redistributing toner 4 22 Repetitive defects 8 6 Safety information iii Scanned image 8 4 Sealing tape 8 8 Small type plugs 8 11 Smears 8 7 Smudged print 8 8 Soft error 4 21 Solid black image 8 5 Start up page 8 3 Technical support 8 21 Test washed out 8 5 Toner bleeds 8 10 Toner cartridge 8 3 Toner flakes 8 10 Toner smears 8 7 Tray chaining 4 24 Vertical black streaks 8 6 Vertical blanks 8 8 Typeface G 10 Family G 3 Style G 9 Index l 15 Typefaces Printer 6 7 U nshielded twisted pair G 10 SB 1 19 2 17 Cable 1 19 Port 4 15 SB information page 2 64 ser s guide 1 7 Conventions 1 3 Overview 1 1 Utilities Auxiliary 2 23 Browser access 2 37 3 43 Installing 3 4 3 21 Language 2 3 Low toner page 2 38 2 68 3 45 3 72 Printer configuration 3 44 Start page 2 38 3 45 TCP IP address changing 2 41 3 47 Utility pages 2 68 3 72 Windows 98 Me 3 4 Utilities Macintosh Downloader 2 34 2 35 PS Files folder 2 36 Uninstall utilities 2 13 Utilities PC Installing 3 4 PDFs folder 3 41 PS_Files folder 3 42 Utility menu Density menu 4 11 Utility pages Browser access 2 68 3 72 Calibration 4 25 Font list 4 25 Font list page 2 68 3 72 Font sample 4 25 Font sample page 2 68
223. opriate procedures in chapter 1 or in Media Sources later in this chapter Set the custom page size through your application Make sure that paper size selections in the page or document setup section agree with those in the Print dialog box to ensure that the page prints correctly Additional RAM is required to print oversized media particularly at high resolutions See Printer Memory Requirements in chapter 6 If a virtual memory error occurs there is not enough printer memory to process the job In this case try adding memory to your printer printing at a lower resolution or using only printer resident fonts Media Types Your printer supports paper envelopes transparencies and film media with weights from 16 36 lb bond 60 135 g m See Media Sources later in this chapter about which media source to use with specific media types and weights See Printing with Various Media Types later in this chapter regarding printing on film envelopes transparencies and labels Media Selecting Handling and Printing 5 3 Media used should meet the guidelines for selecting and storing media covered earlier in this chapter To save on media costs test a sample of new media before buying in quantity Run a test print on plain paper to check layout and alignment before using more expensive stock Media Handling This section describes available options for feeding media to the printer It summarizes the media
224. orced sheet of rubber to transfer the impression from the plate onto the paper Bleed An image printed beyond the page margin so that when trimmed to size the image extends to the edge of the sheet A full bleed is an image which extends to all four edges of the sheet Most XANT printers can print up to an 11 00 x 17 00 279 mm x 432 mm full bleed image on oversized 11 81 x 19 00 300 mm x 483 mm or larger media See your manual for information about the media sizes that can be used with your printer Buffer A temporary data storage area For example a printer buffer holds incoming data waiting to be processed for printing Calibration The measurement and adjustment of hardware output against a standard value set to ensure that output is predictable Glossary G 1 Catch up Globs of ink that appear on final press output This may be solved by increasing the amount of water used on the run and then adjusting the ink water balance by increasing the fountain solution or by adding wetting agent Character Set The complete set of characters that appear in a typeface family See also Typeface and Family Coated Paper Paper coated with clay white pigments and a binder Controller A device that converts application data into printer data Crop Marks Markings at edges of an original image or on a guide sheet to indicate the area for printing or where the image is to be trimmed to the desired size Custom Dot Gain
225. ord 2 68 3 72 Setting a password 2 67 3 71 Service On site 6 10 Service options 6 9 SetIP ps 3 43 Setip ps 2 37 Setname ps 2 37 3 43 Setup issues 8 3 Setzone ps 2 37 3 43 Shaded bold print 8 9 Index 1 13 Shadow dot G 9 Shipment Contents 1 7 Damaged or incomplete 1 7 SIMMs G 9 Smooth Shading menu 2 22 3 16 4 20 Smooth shading PPD option 4 9 SODIMM G 9 Soft error 4 21 Software proprietary iii Special menu Clear font cache 2 36 Printer font directory 2 35 Printer status 2 35 Restart printer 2 36 Spectrophotometer G 9 Spot color G 9 Start page 2 38 3 45 Start up page 1 16 4 25 G 10 Macintosh Utilities 2 37 Not printing 8 3 Strtup Page menu 4 22 Test key 4 3 Test print status message 8 2 Startpg off 3 43 Startpg on 3 43 Startpg ps 2 37 3 43 Startpgoff ps 2 37 Startpgon ps 2 37 Startup page 1 17 2 61 2 68 3 65 3 72 Startup page printing 2 56 Static electricity 7 4 7 5 7 7 Status messages 8 1 Initializing 8 2 Offline 8 2 Paper jam 8 2 Paper out 8 2 Processing 8 2 Ready idle 8 2 Ready printing 8 2 Reset 1 8 2 Resetting job 8 2 Test print 8 2 Waiting 8 3 Warming up 8 3 1 14 Index Storage Printer 6 2 Storage devices Hard disk 2 56 2 57 RAM Disk 2 56 RAM disk 2 57 Storing Printer 6 1 Support Online 2 33 Sysparm ps 2 37 3 43 T TCP IP 2 39 3 43 G 10 TCP IP address Browser 2 41 3 47 TCP IP configuration 2 41 TCP IP protocol 4 15 TCP IP settings Browser 2 41 Technical specificatio
226. oto the printer home page fig 3 110 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details pea Ser eed ee Fig 3 110 Printer Home Page Fig 3 111 PostScript Margins Window 2 Select Printer Configuration PostScript Margins fig 3 110 The PostScript Margins window appears fig 3 111 PC Setup 3 53 3 Check and adjust the PostScript margins if necessary a Click Update Print An alignment test page prints fig 3 112 3 gt Bx T ay zB zi ze BS EE Fig 3 112 Sample Alignment Test Page b NOTE Turn the test page so that the x is to the left and the y is at the top of the crossed lines Check the current settings listed on the test page The factory default is x 0 y 0 which should cause each line to print 1 25 4 mm from the page s edges Coordinates listed on the alignment test page indicate change from the factory default in dots per inch Because these measurements are rounded for display adjustments should b based on careful measurements not the printed coordinates R If current settings are not the factory defaults and you must adjust the coordinates Zi you may reset factory default coordinates by selecting Reset Margins and clicking Update Print another alignment test page using the factory defaults measure the lines and make adjustments if necessary d 3 54 PC Setup Measure the distance from the edge of the page to the x line it should mea
227. our browser WW LPI also can be set through the printer s front panel See Lines Per Inch LPI in chapter 4 for details p aS Margins Printer Margin Adjustment The PostScript Margins feature allows you to adjust your PostScript printer margins so that your images will be positioned exactly on the page Ri When you adjust margins for one page size it affects all media sizes o NOTE Macintosh Setup 2 47 1 Goto the printer home page fig 2 102 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details ra Se eee Fig 2 102 Printer Home Page Fig 2 103 PostScript Margins Window 2 Select Printer Configuration PostScript Margins fig 2 102 The PostScript Margins window appears fig 2 103 3 Check and adjust the PostScript margins if necessary a Click Update Print An alignment test page prints fig 2 104 ey Alignment test page Current settings x 0 y 0 Fig 2 104 Sample Alignment Test Page b Turn the test page so that the x is to the left and the y is at the top of the crossed lines c Check the current settings listed on the test page The factory default is x 0 y 0 which should cause each line to print 1 25 4 mm from the page s edges 2 48 Macintosh Setup Coordinates listed on the alignment test page indicate change from the factory default in dots per inch Because these measurements are rounded for display adjustments should be based on car
228. ow Fig 2 32 Installation Was Successful Window 9 Wait until the Installation Was Successful window appears fig 2 32 then click Quit Macintosh Setup 2 13 Install the PostScript Driver AdobePS OS 9 You can install the Adobe PostScript Driver AdobePS in two ways from the XANTE Utilities via the Install Printer menu or via the Drivers drop down menu link 1l Insert the XANT Utilities CD ROM into your Macintosh The Main Installation window should open automatically fig 2 33 If not double click the CD ROM icon then double click the Setup icon Then select the desired language from the drop down menu Fig 2 33 Main Installation Window Fig 2 34 Drivers Menu 2 Select AdobePS Driver from the Install Printer drop down menu fig 2 33 or select AdobePS Driver from the Drivers menu fig 2 34 The AdobePS Introduction window appears fig 2 35 On most systems the AdobePS program launches when you click PostScript Driver unless this version of the driver is installed already If not open it manually by double clicking AdobePS in the Drivers AdobePS X X Eng or appropriate language folder The X X will be replaced by the driver version it is recommended that you install the latest version 2 14 Macintosh Setup 3 Click Continue in the AdobePS Introduction window fig 2 35 The License window appears fig 2 36 Lm C Le o Fig 2 35 AdobePS Introduction Window Fig 2 86 License Win
229. ow you to create custom curves for specific conditions Gateway An electronic device that connects two networks each of which operates with a different set of protocols such as AppleTalk and EtherTalk Ghosting A faint repetition of a pattern produced during imaging Graphic Information presented in the form of pictures or images Grayscale A media test strip starting with a 100 black swatch and progressing through lighter gray tints usually in 5 or 10 increments to 0 black white Halftone A method of producing the appearance of smooth gradations of color by printing dots of various sizes at constant intervals on a grid In printing the dots are actually halftone cells which are themselves a grid of printer dots The size of the halftone is varied by printing or not printing dots within the halftone cell Hard Disk A storage medium made up of a magnetic disk or disks platters sealed into a drive or cartridge Most XANTE printers support an internal drive and some support multiple external SCSI drives Hickeys Imperfections in press work due to dirt on the press Highlight Dot The highest density of a halftone image G 4 Glossary Holdout Media s ability to hold ink on the surface rather than to absorb it Ink held on the surface dries in a more precise crisp pattern than absorbed ink which spreads out causing dot gain See also Dot Gain IDE Integrated Drive Electronics A standard used to integr
230. ow you to print images directly to XANT Myriad Film process the output through XANT s FilmStar 4 and then use film to burn metal plates The FilmMaker 4 offers high resolution and true Adobe PostScript 3 output on up to 13 x 35 5 330 mm x 901 mm media Plus this versatile printer prints on paper cover film transparencies labels and envelopes About this Manual This user s guide covers installation setup and operation of a FilmMaker 4 printer Chapter 1 Introduction and Installation summarizes this manual and your printer features optional configurations as well as the printer s warranty It also covers printer setup required cabling and a printer overview Chapter 2 Macintosh Setup describes the XANT Utilities for the Macintosh This includes connecting to the appropriate interface installing the Adobe PostScript printer driver your printer s PPD printer utilities and Adobe Downloader as well as procedures for using many features Introduction and Installation 1 1 Chapter 3 PC Setup describes the XANTE Utilities for the PC This includes connecting to the appropriate interface installing the Adobe PostScript printer driver your printer s PPD printer utilities and procedures for using many features Chapter 4 Configuration describes using front panel keys and menus and the Print dialog box to configure many printer features Chapter 5 Media Selecting Handling and Printing describes selecting me
231. p Parallel Connection Installation g s z Use the following procedure to finish the utilities and drivers installation process When you selected the Local Printer option in the previous procedure the Port window appears fig 3 12 1 Select the appropriate port fig 3 12 then click Next The Select Printer Model window appears fig 3 13 y Sees E paa cen irri t abe pence baari nans rib ae Parine Panam ses ouem rem Fig 3 12 Port Window Fig 3 13 Select Printer Model Window 2 Select your printer model fig 3 13 then click Next The Printer Information window appears fig 3 14 Ten Cii sid ol Img ie uid e im nim MH rim i rim mir Veri Bai ie i pmi ri eH i fom t esa pum hri eri Por be omg iT gi fecic NL he agn nad j Fig 3 14 Printer Information Window Fig 3 15 Setup Information Window 3 Enter the printer name set the default option and select Yes to print the test page fig 3 14 then click Next The Setup Information window appears fig 3 15 S Printing the test page confirms that your printer is connected and communicating b v4 with your computer correctly 4 Verify that the setup information is correct fig 3 15 then click Install The Printer Configuration window appears fig 3 16 PC Setup 3 7 Fig 3 16 Printer Configuration Window 5 Select Yes or No to configure the printer now fig 3 16 then click Next and take the follo
232. place it on a flat surface and press it smooth to make the corners and folds as flat as possible Feed envelopes print side up short edge first Load envelopes flap open in the multipurpose feeder to provide the best print quality in the address area Load envelopes flap closed in the envelope cassette Format envelopes in your application and run a plain paper test print to check flap alignment before running on more expensive envelope stock Use the Cool fuser temperature setting when printing envelopes Printing Labels Always use the multipurpose feeder following the procedure in chapter 1 the media specifications earlier in this chapter and these guidelines when printing labels Do not overload the label stock Label sheets compressed by the weight of the stack will expand as they feed into the printer which can cause a jam Make sure labels are not curled on the corners or coming loose from the backing sheet Media Selecting Handling and Printing 5 9 Use only labels that are rated as laser safe Do not use label sheets with exposed adhesives such as partially used sheets or sheets on which the adhesive has seeped through to the surface Use the Cool fuser temperature setting when printing labels Printing Transparencies Always use the multipurpose feeder following the procedure in chapter 1 the media specifications earlier in this chapter and these guidelines when printing transparencies Avoid handling tr
233. ponding percentage in the Enter Coverage Values section For example when you are reading for 2 if the box labeled 7 measures 2 enter the number 7 in the corresponding box Y Calibration page blocks are numbered from 0 to 255 You may have to check several blocks to find the one that most closely matches the percentage in the Densitometer Data Entry window Also it is not necessary to measure for each coverage value but that is recommended to achieve more accurate results NOTE BS h Click Linearize fig 2 98 To verify linearization click the Print Verification Page button 2 98 and then click Print before you close the Linearization window When this page prints compare it to the original calibration page to verify the gamma correction you should see an improvement in gray scale progression S 4 Close your browser LPI Default Setting LPI options allow you set the default Lines Per Inch Ipi on your printer 2 46 Macintosh Setup 1 Go to the printer home page fig 2 100 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 2 100 Printer Home Page Fig 2 101 Default LP Window 2 Select Printer Configuration PostScript LPI fig 2 100 The Default LPI window appears fig 2 101 3 Select the desired LPI for your printer from the Default LPI drop down menu fig 2 101 Options go from 5 to 210 in single increments the factory default is 85 LPI Then click Change 4 Close y
234. ptional hard disk installed on the printer This feature allows you to format the optional hard disk which must be done before you can use that disk Wi You must format the optional hard disk before it can be used to store downloaded 4 fonts Formatting erases all information stored on that disk Use this feature from the Utility Hard Disk configuration menu The only option is Format 4 14 Configuration Interface Control Your printer features three standard simultaneously active interfaces Parallel Ethernet and USB The parallel and Ethernet ports allow you to send files from Macintosh computers concurrently all three ports allow you to send files from PC computers concurrently The Ethernet port supports EtherTalk LPR TCP IP and IPP protocols Use Interfaces configuration menus to set printer interface options for the IP Address Net Class Net Mask Gateway and DHCP See chapter 2 Macintosh or 3 PC about configuring the Ethernet interface for your network environment IP Address Net Mask and Gateway Configuration When using the Ethernet interface and TCP IP protocol use the front panel IP address Network IpAddr Network Mask Network Net Mask and Gateway Network Gateway configuration menus and the front panel keys to set the address mask and gateway as follows Reset key increases the current number flashing by one Menu key moves to the next number to the right of the current number flashing Test key
235. purpose feeder or a paper cassette and the error ra message does not disappear open and close the top cover and multipurpose feeder again Calling for Technical Support If you encounter problems that cannot be resolved by following the procedures in this chapter you may call XANTE s Technical Support at 800 926 8393 US and Canada from 7 a m until 6 p m Central Standard Time CST Monday through Friday From other areas call your XANTE vendor Wi Depending on your service agreement there may be a charge for Technical Support To assist our technicians in serving you more effectively please have the following information available when calling for Technical Support Troubleshooting Information A start up page from the printer Printer model and serial number on the XANT sticker on the back of the printer Printer ROM version Press the On Line key for 5 seconds the version appears in the window Your computer type and operating system version number Configuration menu settings for your printer interface Amount of printer memory shown on start up page Applications including version numbers you are using Full description of the problem List of error or status messages if applicable You can email questions to ts1 xante com Include your name your company name and the troubleshooting information listed earlier in this section Indicate whether you wish the response to be faxed or emailed and incl
236. put tray 2 58 Diagnostic information 2 60 3 65 DPI 2 42 2 43 EP1 2 52 3 57 EtherTalk 3 46 EtherTalk configuration 2 39 Feature access 2 37 3 43 Fontlist page 2 68 3 72 Font sample page 2 68 Fuser Temperature 2 52 Fuser temperature 2 53 3 57 3 58 General configuration 2 40 General information 2 60 2 61 3 65 General network configuration 3 46 Hard disk 2 56 Help 2 69 2 70 I O configuration 3 45 I O settings information 2 60 Informational Pages 2 38 Informational pages 2 38 3 45 Installed options 2 60 2 65 3 68 Linearization 2 42 2 44 Low toner page 2 38 2 68 3 45 3 72 LPI 2 42 2 46 Margins 2 42 2 47 Media types 2 59 Menu layout 2 69 More X ACT 2 42 2 50 NEIT 2 52 2 54 3 57 3 59 Network 2 38 Network configuration 2 39 Network page 2 38 2 68 3 45 Network settings 3 47 PostScript 2 38 PostScript features 3 48 Print density 2 52 2 55 3 57 3 60 Print Quality 2 38 2 52 3 57 F2 Index RAM disk 2 56 Register printer 2 69 2 70 Reset factory defaults 2 38 2 56 Start page 2 38 2 68 3 45 Startup page 2 68 3 72 Storage devices 2 38 2 56 TCP IP address 2 41 3 47 TCP IP configuration 2 41 TCP IP settings 2 41 Trays and media 2 38 Utility pages 2 68 3 72 VM 3 57 Web access 2 69 3 73 XANT support 2 34 XANT web site 2 69 2 70 Buffer G 1 Buffer size 2 40 C Cables FCC Class A compliance iv IDE hard disk 7 12 Parallel 1 18 Shielded required iv Troubleshooting 8 3 8
237. r This includes such things as the printer s name IP address and current firmware version This page prints each time you start the printer unless you disable it How you disable or enable this printing depends on your environment Macintosh or PC The PS Files Folder Macintosh and PS_Files Folder PC on the XANT CD ROM contain download PostScript files Startpgon ps and Startpgoff ps that enable or disable this printing Macintosh Use Adobe Downloader to download the appropriate file to enable or to disable startup page printing See Using Adobe Downloader and PS Files Folder in chapter 2 for details PC Use the following DOS command substituting the appropriate file name and a different port if necessary to enable or to disable startup page printing COPY FILENAME PS LPT See PS Files Folder in chapter 3 for details FK You also can use the Turn Startup Page On Off option available through your browser b after you download the XANTE Utilities See Informational Pages Start Page Low Toner Page and Network Page in chapter 2 Macintosh or 3 PC for details NOTE Introduction and Installation 1 17 Printer Ports Overview Your printer has standard parallel 10 100BaseT Ethernet EtherTalk LPR TCP IP and IPP and USB ports fig 1 30 These simultaneously active interfaces can receive jobs from different operating environments without hardware switching ETHERNET USB PARALLEL
238. r On Press the on the power switch to turn on the printer fig 1 29 Fig 1 29 Turn Printer On Printer initialization takes approximately 60 seconds When Ready Idle displays the printer is ready to accept print jobs Wi Due to shipping movement you should calibrate your printer after setup For d procedures see the More X ACT section of PostScript Features AccelaFont DPI Linearization LPI Margins More X ACT and VM in chapter 2 Macintosh or 3 PC DA Following initialization a start up page prints if that feature is enabled This page lists the selected resolution installed RAM hard disk identities page count enabled interfaces and network information Review this page to be sure that the printer is configured properly See Printing a Startup Page later in this chapter and Start up Page in chapter 4 for details 1 16 Introduction and Installation Turning the Printer Off 1 Verify that the Ready Idle message displays 2 Press the O on the power switch to turn off the printer fig 1 29 yc When the printer is turned off job information in memory is lost N Printing a Startup Page The first time you turn on the printer it goes through an approximately 60 second initialization and then prints a start up page automatically The printer does not have to be attached to the host to print this page The startup page contains configuration information concerning your printe
239. ransmission Protocol See Protocol Trapping The process of slightly overlapping colors of adjoining images to prevent a thin white line misregistration from appearing between the images Typeface A typeface is a set of characters The characters in a typeface all have three things in common family style and character set See also Font Family and Character Set Unshielded Twisted Pair Cable A commonly used IEEE Ethernet cabling standard UTP or 10BaseT consists of two insulated copper strands twisted about each other to reduce outside interference signals UTP cable which is used to create star networks is relatively inexpensive easy to install easy to modify and may already exist in many installations as part of the telephone network See also 10 100BaseT Vector Image An image composed of a mathematical description of lines curves and geometric shapes See Bitmapped Image and Raster Image Vellum A type of semitransparent media used in the printing industry to replace more expensive film negatives Vellum is used in screen printing environments such as in T shirt printing See also Myriad Film G 10 Glossary Volatile Parameters Printer parameters which only last during the printer s current power cycle For example the PostScript parameter jobname specifies the name of the current printing job being processed WPD File Windows Printer Description file A special file providing printer specific information nee
240. ration page from the Input Tray options c Select the LPI that will achieve 256 levels of gray from the LPI drop down menu Options are from 5 LPI to 210 LPI in increments of 1 the factory default is 85 LPI FR For 600 dpi select 85 lpi for 1200 lpi select 106 lpi for 2400 lpi select 133 to 150 Ipi A Any lpi may be used measure the lpi that is to be used for final output d e Select the desired resolution Options are 600 dpi and 1200 dpi also if you have the 2400 dpi upgrade is installed on your system 2400 dpi will appear Select Calibration Page and click Print A calibration page prints TT BEEBENHNEHHNHENH S aca el ll alll cl oa a el el chad al ll cl cl lS a cl ah el cco lo BEHHEHEHEHER NHEREHEHEEHNH Fig 2 99 Sample Calibration Page Macintosh Setup 2 45 ES Always print the calibration page using the same media and toner or press ink as used sA for the final copy Also when possible calibrate from the final output For example when calibrating for heavy paper use heavy paper f Measure individual patches on the calibration page making sure that you first place the page on a white background See your densitometer documentation for how to take the measurements g Make sure to enter the solid black 1 and solid white 2 measurements first Enter the number of the patch whose densitometer measurement most closely matches within 2 the corres
241. re in Tray Selection Options in chapter 4 when tray chaining All selected media sources must contain the same size media If the printer detects a different size media when it switches to a new tray a Paper Out message appears 5 6 Media Selecting Handling and Printing All trays must be inserted properly When tray chaining is enabled an incorrectly positioned tray will prevent the printer from printing Printing Double Sided Copy You can print double sided copy manually by feeding paper through the printer twice Manual Double Sided Copy 1 Print the first side of the paper 2 Remove the paper from the output tray straighten any curling edges and allow it to cool thoroughly 3 Load the paper using the following guidelines R For best results when printing on the second side feed sheets individually or slip feed b feed a blank sheet between each printed sheet to prevent toner from sticking to adjacent pages NOTE a Determine whether to load the media short or long edge first See Loading Media earlier in this chapter b Printa test page or check your software documentation to determine the orientation of the media s top edge c Load media into the multipurpose feeder print side up 4 Print the second side Printing with Various Media Types This section covers printing on film envelopes labels and transparencies It also lists Myriad film sizes Chapter 1 provides information o
242. re incorrect click Change Options when the More X ACT Advanced Setup window appears fig 3 176 make the necessary changes Fig 3 176 More X ACT Advanced Setup Window PC Setup 3 81 C d Under Paper Source if you select Manual Feed go to step 4 b if not skip to 4 c Under Manual Feed Options if you are using standard size media click Standard Paper Size and select the size from the drop down menu If you are using a custom size click Custom Paper Size and enter the size and select the unit of measure inch millimeter or centimeter Under Print Settings select the resolution from the drop down menu Click OK The More X ACT window reappears fig 3 177 5 Click Print Calibration Page A test page similar to the one shown in the Calibration Page section prints fig 3 178 T1 ee das Tp imd GA Litus Fa ris er omda hrpe bo m r n adm Beer en a crga cn aba pep emm Londen ha mag catania ic mestre yc pad juli by n etc emg teg E E rr pr pr ru mdi Te Cereal F Cree Dium Bei inim Fap pa iy Lies Lala aces Sa Drg a mai nha nasum ert canon mau bart yi dem VE L med ethers il omn im hr mim dmi EN ww U UM Bg EN mw E NM NM nec pm Fig 3 177 More X ACT Window Fig 3 178 Sample More X ACT Calibration Page 6 Make the measurements indicated on the calibration page next to boxes A through F I and J record
243. ree with your network s SA TCP IP addresses Check with your System Supervisor for the correct TCP IP address To configure TCP IP settings 1 Goto the printer home page fig 2 91 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details g UE Fig 2 91 Printer Home Page Fig 2 92 TCP IP Configuration Window 2 Select Printer Configuration Network TCP IP fig 2 91 The TCP IP Configuration window appears fig 2 92 Macintosh Setup 2 41 3 Check and change the following settings accordingly if necessary fig 2 92 a Change the TCP IP address Network Class if necessary check with your System Supervisor then click Change b Change the printer s default TCP IP address Network and Node IDs to the address assigned by your System Supervisor by using the scroll arrows beside each number then click Change c Change the Subnet Mask if necessary then click Change If you are using DHCP continue to step 4 d otherwise skip to step 4 d Select either DHCP On or DHCP Off and click Change 4 Close your browser then restart your printer to make the new TCP IP address take effect PostScript Features AccelaFont DPI Linearization LPI Margins More X ACT and VM PostScript features include AccelaFont DPI Linearization LPI Margins More X ACT and VM options AccelaFont AccelalFont options allow you to set aside a portion of RAM disk to store fonts for quick system access AccelaFont auto
244. rface and remove the cassette cover fig 1 18 Then lift the paper length guide to release it and slide it forward fig 1 19 Fig 1 18 Remove Cassette Cover Fig 1 19 Move Length Guide 3 Squeeze the sides of the paper width guide to release it Then slide the guide to the outside of the cassette fig 1 20 Fig 1 20 Move Width Guide Fig 1 21 Load Paper 1 12 Introduction and Installation 4 Align the paper stack and load it into the cassette print side up leading edge to the back See Media Sources in chapter 5 to determine whether to load media short or long edge first fig 1 21 5 Adjust media guides to the size of the paper stack A To prevent paper jams make sure the paper fits between the paper guides and under the cassette s retaining clips fig 1 21 6 Replace the cassette cover Then slide the cassette into the printer until it snaps into place RU You will feel a slight resistance as you push the cassette into the printer this is caused bythe catch that prevents the cassette from being dropped 2 7 Pull out the output tray extension and turn up the paper stop for paper sizes larger than letter A4 fig 1 22 Fig 1 22 Adjust Output Tray Extension Multipurpose Feeder The printer s multipurpose feeder feeds up to 150 sheets of 20 Ib bond 60 Ib text weight 65 g m paper or media such as labels and transparencies to a stack height of about 70 18 mm The m
245. rinter home page fig 3 133 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 3 133 Printer Home Page Fig 3 134 Input Tray Window 2 Select Printer Configuration Trays and Media Input Tray fig 3 133 The Input Tray window appears fig 3 134 3 Select the tray you wish to be the default tray from the drop down menu The drop down menu list will depend upon what tray options you have installed Then click Change 4 Close your browser Media Types The Media Types options allow you to configure the media types for each of your printer s input sources l Goto the printer home page fig 3 135 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details PC Setup 3 63 Fig 3 135 Printer Home Page Fig 3 136 Media Types Window 2 Select Printer Configuration Media Types fig 3 135 The Media Types window appears fig 3 136 3 Select the desired media type for the input source fig 3 136 Options for the media type are Paper Transparency Cover Stock Label Stock Paper Plate Polyester Plate Matte Film Clear Film Heavy Paper and UserDef User Defined 1 through 5 Paper is the factory default Then click Change If an optional cassette is installed you can designate the type of media for it 4 Close your browser RG You also can configure the media type through your printer s front panel See Media T a m Types in chapter 4 for details Printer Informatio
246. rkXPress The XANTE Utilities Installer loads the QuarkXPress PDE To load these PDFs manually 1 Load and configure the Adobe PostScript printer driver and your printer s PPD following instructions in Installing AdobePS Printer Driver and Printer PPD earlier in this chapter 2 Copy your printer s PDF file from the PDFs folder to the Xpress PDF directory on your PC by typing the following command substituting the drive letter containing the XANT Utilities CD ROM for Drive COPY Drive WDrivers your printer s folder WuarkWyour printer s PDF C XPRESS PDF 4 PC Setup 3 41 PS Files Folder This folder contains Adobe PostScript files to help setup and maintain your printer They help in areas such as keeping track of your printer s status performing specific functions and printing fonts samples These files can be downloaded to your printer by typing the following DOS command substituting the appropriate file name and a different port if necessary COPY FILENAME PS LPT1 4 Accelafont ps allows you to set the percentage of ramdisk available for the Font Accelerator feature D ps contains a Control D PostScript s end of job marker for use with applications that do not send a PostScript end of file Description txt contains an overview of the files in the PS Files folder This file can be printed using Adobe Acrobat 3 0 or later DHCPOFEPS allows you to disable the DHCP protocol DHCPON PS allows you
247. rn off your printer and disconnect it from the power source A Use only water or mild detergent for cleaning To prevent discoloration cracking and deformation of the case do not use alcohol ammonia based cleaners or other volatile cleaners on or around the printer Never spray or pour solutions directly on the printer Always put the solution on the cloth and wipe the printer with the cloth 2 Clean the printer s exterior using a clean lint free cloth dampened with water fig 6 4 Fig 6 4 Exterior Cleaning 6 6 Maintenance and Specifications 3 Give the printer a few minutes to dry thoroughly Then reconnect the printer to the power source Technical Specifications Type Engine Speed Power Supply 100 120 V Version 220 240 V Version Power Consumption 100 120 V Version 220 240 V Version Noise Level Dimensions Weight Environment Language Typefaces Laser printer IDT 79RC3255 processor 10 ppm with 2400 dpi upgrade installed 100 120 VAC 90 132 V 50 60 Hz 47 63 Hz 6 5 Amps 220 240 VAC 198 264 V 50 60 Hz 47 63 Hz 3 2 Amps 100 VAC Maximum 580 W Running Maximum 5 W Pause Mode 6 5 Amps 220 VAC Maximum 580 W Running Maximum 5 W Pause Mode 50 60 Hz 47 63 Hz 3 2 Amps Printing less than 49 5 dB without Duplexer Printing less than 50 5 dB with Duplexer Standby less than 35 dB W 22 82 580 mm D 23 68 602 mm with cassette
248. rom the back of the controller housing until the video connector clears the housing The video connector is on the back of the controller board close to the upper edge fig 7 19 c Grasp the interface plate fig 7 19 and slide the board unit left until it clears the metal tabs that secure it to the housing d Shift the controller board unit out of the housing until it clears the metal tabs on the controller housing 7 10 Options e Slide the controller board unit as far right as possible and lift the bottom edge of the controller out followed by the top edge Installing the IDE Hard Disk l Install the IDE hard disk a Screw the four stand off posts into the four corner holes on the bottom of the IDE hard disk fig 7 20 f Stand Off lt gt Nylon Screw T Fig 7 20 Attach Stand Off Posts Fig 7 21 Mount Disk to Controller Board b Align the hard disk over the white outline on the front of the controller board figs 7 7 and 7 21 c Slide the four screws up through the bottom of the controller board and screw them into the base of the stand off posts on the bottom of the IDE hard disk to mount the disk fig 7 21 2 Connect the IDE cable to the hard disk and the controller board a X Align the IDE cable so the blue edge is toward the left side of the IDE hard disk fig 7 22 pp Four pins extend past the end of the IDE cable on the left front of the disk Make sure I i m to lea
249. rough the printer s front panel See Fuser b v4 Temperature in chapter 4 for details NOTE NEIT Negative Enhanced Imaging Technology NEIT is a laser power setting that is used for negative prints Choosing a lower setting increases laser power and causes the output to be darker Choosing a higher setting decreases laser power and cause the output to be lighter The NEIT feature allows you to change your default NEIT settings for each media type See Negative Enhanced Imaging Technology NEIT in chapter 4 for more details FK This NEIT feature can be used only if you are printing a negative to Matte Film A NOTE 2 54 Macintosh Setup 1 Go to the printer home page fig 2 114 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details EE TI Fig 2 114 Printer Home Page Fig 2 115 Default NEIT Settings Window 2 Select Printer Configuration Print Quality NEIT fig 2 114 The Default NEIT Settings window appears fig 2 115 3 Select Matte Film from the Media Type drop down menu fig 2 115 Then click Change 4 Select the desired NEIT setting from the NEIT drop down menu fig 2 115 Options are 0 Dark 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 the factory default 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 and 20 Light Then click Change 5 Close the browser Print Density This feature allows you to adjust the density of toner on your printed page Density options range from 0 light to 7 dark
250. rpose feeder as the media source using the printer s front panel Tray Select key or your application s Print dialog box Use tray chaining to pull paper from all cassettes and the multipurpose feeder that are loaded with and configured for the same paper size Media Selecting Handling and Printing 5 5 Load envelopes short edge first in the envelope cassette and the multipurpose feeder Load envelopes flap closed in the envelope cassette or flap open in the multipurpose feeder to provide a flatter address area print surface Load media in the cassettes and multipurpose feeder print side up leading edge to the back of the printer Most media packages indicate the print side Use the following chart to determine alignment for standard paper sizes in the universal cassette and multipurpose feeder Media Universal Multipurpose Size Cassette Feeder A3 Short Short A4 Long Long A5 Long Long B4 Short Short B5 Long Long Legal Short Short Ledger Short Short Letter Long Long Executive Long Long Statement Long Long Envelopes N A Short Oversize Short Short Short Short Edge First Long Long Edge First Oversize paper 12 00 x 17 25 306 mm x 439 mm to 13 00 x 18 50 330 mm x 470 mm Tray Chaining Tray chaining directs the printer to automatically switch to another source for media when the current source is empty You can chain to all paper cassettes and the multipurpose feeder Use the following guidelines and the procedu
251. rs on the printer start up page The Printer Home Page appears fig 3 90 Fig 3 90 Printer Home Page The home page has four major categories Printer Configuration Printer Information Printer Maintenance and Utility Pages Printer Configuration Printer Configuration options control the printer s Informational Pages Network PostScript options Print Quality some printer factory defaults Storage Devices and Trays and Media To access printer configuration features 1 Goto the printer home page fig 3 91 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 3 91 Printer Home Page Fig 3 92 Printer Configuration Options 2 Select Printer Configuration fig 3 91 printer configuration options appear fig 3 92 3 44 PC Setup Printer Configuration has six options Informational Pages Network PostScript Print Quality Reset Factory Defaults Storage Devices and Trays and Media fig 3 92 Informational Pages Start Page Low Toner Page and Network Page The Information Pages window allows you enable or disable printing of the start up page the low toner page and the Network Page 1 Go to the printer home page fig 3 93 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details KANTE z D 3 x bo a a m Fig 3 93 Printer Home Page Fig 3 94 Informational Pages Window 2 Select Printer Configuration Informational Pages fig 3 93 The
252. s A will be listed as Not Installed 4 Close your browser Printer Maintenance The Printer Maintenance Clean Printer option allows you to access your printer s cleaning feature 1 Goto the printer home page fig 2 146 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 2 146 Printer Home Page Fig 2 147 Clean Printer Window Macintosh Setup 2 65 2 Select Printer Maintenance Clean Printer fig 2 146 The Clean Printer window appears fig 2 147 3 Click Clean Printer fig 2 147 to run the clean printer feature which cleans the printer s fuser roller 4 Close your browser Printer Security This feature is designed to prevent unwanted changes to the printer configuration Some of the printer features that are configurable from the printer s web page can be locked by setting a password to that printer When a password is set the user has to log in to access these features Login and Logout When printer security password protection is active you have to login to access the printer s secure web page areas and should log out when you are finished 1 Goto the printer home page fig 2 148 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 2 148 Printer Home Page Fig 2 149 Login Window 2 Select Printer Security Login fig 2 148 The Login windows appears fig 2 149 3 Enter your password in the Password field fig 2 149 4 Click submit you now can a
253. s active you have to login to access the printer s secure webpage areas and should log out when you are finished 1 Go to the printer home page fig 3 156 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig Fig 3 156 Printer Home Page Fig Fig 3 157 Login Window 2 Select Printer Security Login fig 3 156 The Login windows appears fig 3 157 3 Enter your password in the Password field fig 3 157 4 Click submit you now can access the secure webpage areas When you are through using the browser select Printer Security Logout fig 3156 The Logout window appears fig 3 158 3 70 PC Setup Fig 3 158 Logout Window 5 Click Submit When a message appears that you are now logged out close the browser Set Password Set Password allows you to set your printer s password to access the secure webpage area 1 Goto the printer home page fig 2 159 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 2 159 Printer Home Page 2 Select Printer Security Set Password fig 2 159 A Set Password windows appears fig 2 160 or fig 2 161 Fig 2 160 Set Password Window 1 Fig 2 161 Set Password Window 2 If you do not have a password When figure 2 160 appears skip to step 3 PC Setup 3 71 If you have a password When figure 2 161 appears enter your password in the Current Password field and then continue to step 3 3 Type ina password of
254. sign then gently guide the cable s end pin side down straight into its connector on the controller board until the end seats firmly Then if a power cord ferrite was on your printer put it back on the power cord making sure the latch closes completely fig 7 15 Turn the front panel display cable so that the metal pin side of the end faces out from the printer Slide the end down through the top right corner opening on the controller assembly frame then gently guide the cable s end pin side down straight into its connector on the controller board until end seats firmly Slide the controller assembly into place on the printer s left side and press the area above the video connection to secure the connection Replace the six screws securing the controller assembly to the printer fig 7 14 Replace the front side cover a b Align the cover s two bottom tabs and two top latches with their corresponding slots on the printer fig 7 13 Insert the bottom tabs first and then swing the top latches up into place Replace the front cover a b Tilt the cover to the side just above the printer and to the left fig 7 12 Reconnect the front panel display cable fig 7 12 making sure the foil side of the cable s end faces the pin side of the connector on the front panel cover Turn the front panel cover upright and lower it down into place on the printer making sure to align the securing holes on th
255. sor for the correct TCP IP address To configure TCP IP settings l Goto the printer home page fig 3 99 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details Fig 3 99 Printer Home Page Fig 3 100 TCP IP Configuration Window PC Setup 3 47 2 Select Printer Configuration Network TCP IP fig 3 99 The TCP IP Configuration window appears fig 3 100 3 Check and change the following settings accordingly if necessary fig 3 100 a Change the TCP IP address Network Class if necessary check with your System Supervisor then click Change b Change the printer s default TCP IP address Network and Node IDs to the address assigned by your System Supervisor by using the scroll arrows beside each number then click Change c Change the Subnet Mask if necessary then click Change If you are using DHCP continue to step 4 d otherwise skip to step 4 d Select either DHCP On or DHCP Off and click Change 4 Close your browser then restart your printer to make the new TCP IP address take effect PostScript Features AccelaFont DPI Linearization LPI Margins More X ACT and VM PostScript features include AccelaFont DPI Linearization LPI Margins and More X ACT options AccelaFont AccelaFont options allow you to set aside a portion of RAM disk to store fonts for quick system access AccelaFont automatically loads the most recently used fonts from the printer s optional hard disk into the RAM disk
256. sting See Adjusting Print Density in chapter 4 The toner cartridge may need replacing See Toner Cartridge in chapter 1 Horizontal banding appears on the printed image Printer Printer Paper dust and toner may have accumulated in the printer Clean it See Cleaning the Printer in chapter 6 Use the cassette cover to prevent dust and debris from settling on the media and getting into the printer Media may be damp or otherwise damaged Make sure it meets the requirements in Media Specifications in chapter 5 If necessary replace the media See Standard Cassette and Multipurpose Feeder in chapter 1 Toner may have settled in the cartridge Remove and shake it gently to redistribute the toner See Toner Cartridge in chapter 1 The density setting may need adjusting See Adjusting Print Density in chapter 4 The toner cartridge may need replacing See Toner Cartridge in chapter 1 Troubleshooting 8 9 e Printer or application settings may need to be adjusted for the image The line screen may need to be adjusted in your application Lowering the line screen at a set resolution produces larger dots and more levels of gray which result in a more accurate image representation The resolution may need to be adjusted Raising the resolution at a set line screen produces more levels of gray which results in a more accurate image representation Only a portion
257. sure 1 25 4 mm This distance is dependent on the y coordinate If an adjustment needs to be made use the following appropriate procedure To move the x line away from the edge of the page select an appropriate plus value in the X Coordinate field To move the x line closer to the edge of the page select an appropriate minus value in the X Coordinate field NOTE e Measure the distance from the edge of the page to the y line it should measure 1 25 4 mm This distance is dependent on the x coordinate If an adjustment needs to be made use the following appropriate procedure To move the y line away from the page s edge select an appropriate plus value in the Y Coordinate field To move the y line closer to the page s edge select an appropriate minus value in the Y Coordinate field You can preview a coordinate change s effect on image placement To do this change the x and y coordinates as desired then click View Coordinates The shifts accordingly on the screen page and the original position appears as a gray fig 3 113 This is only a preview the change will not take effect unless you click Update Print Fig 3 113 View Coordinates Window f Print another alignment page see step 3 g Measure the x and y lines on the new test page If the lines are not each 1 25 4 mm from the edge of the paper go back to step 3c and repeat the process 4 Close your browser when the x and y
258. t allows you to designate the type of media used and to access correct temperatures for that media Set Media Weight from your application Print dialog box Options are Paper Clear Film Matte Film Heavy Paper Cover Transparency and Labels media weights R You can create custom gamma curves to calibrate or adjust your printer for specific A media weights For details see Halftone Calibration Technology Gamma in chapter 4 and see the linearization section of PostScript Features AccelaFont DPI Linearization LPI Margins More X ACT and VM later in this chapter NOTE Mirror Print Mirror Print allows you to produce a mirror image which is reversed left to right fig 2 46 This type of image is used to produce right reading documents required for imaging silk screens or metal plates Set Mirror Print from your application Print dialog box To ensure the highest quality when producing mirror images use this menu in the Print dialog box rather than an application setting True enables this feature and False the factory default disables it zl gt E CRAB AVITADAY Y OJOVHJAT VI AMI eonottisH qeit as 11A niI bris 52iv2G 94O mort C Q3oMWAHV3 3VITAO3A Y9OJOVHO3T 9VI9AMI d 4 7 Fig 2 46 Mirror Image Macintosh Setup 2 21 Optimize Output For The Optimize Output For feature allows you to choose between Quality and Speed When quality output is more important than printing speed se
259. t message to put paper into the manual feed tray and click OK To disable this prompt This prompt can only be turned off in Print Monitor You cannot turn the manual feed message off on the Desktop Print Monitor 1 Go to System Folder Extensions PrintMonitor 2 Double click Print Monitor to open it Then select File Preferences 3 Select Give no Notification under When a manual feed job starts then click OK fig 1 27 Frilvevnr was hms tie PrinltAariter Giada hen printings hh OC hes Den a gimting are acci d be primi O Dalg aplay iz Paplirglign mena amp D ita dixpleg iran in mene bar G nadispeg eit When a mangal deed jah xinriz up fea elie a es M CiDnplay iror ix mmu bar Li man dis pig arri Fig 1 27 Print Monitor Preferences Connecting the Power Cord 1 Make sure the printer s power switch is off the O is pressed in 2 Connect the power cable s female connector to the back of the printer and the male connector to a standard electrical outlet fig 1 28 oc Plug the printer into a dedicated properly grounded AC outlet Do not use an extension cord Use a surge protected outlet to help prevent power source fluctuations from damaging your printer Introduction and Installation 1 15 Fig 1 28 Connect Power Cord to Printer Never use a damaged power cord Check the cord and plug monthly and replace immediately if you find any damage Turning the Printe
260. t settings Prnipsub ps prints IP parameters including the IP address subnet mask and default gateway Ramdisk ps allows you to set the size of the RAM disk feature Setip ps allows you to set your printer s IP address Open the file in a text editor such as SimpleText and change the IP address in the parentheses to your printer s IP address Save and download the file to your printer Restart the printer to make the change effective Setname ps allows you to change the printer s name Setzone ps allows you to set your printer s EtherTalk zone name Open the file in a text editor such as SimpleText and change name of zone in the parentheses to the name of your EtherTalk zone Save the file and download it to your printer Restart the printer to make the change effective Startpg ps allows you to print the printer s start up page Startpgoff ps disables the printer s start up page feature preventing the page from printing automatically each time the printer is restarted Startpgon ps enables the printer s start up page feature causing the page to print automatically each time the printer is restarted Syspram ps prints a list of current system parameters Using the Browser Feature Access You can access many printer features using your browser and the printer s home page utilities The next sections cover going to the home page and accessing printer features options and information available there Pr
261. ted before the change is effective Setname ps allows you to change the printer s name Setzone ps allows you to set your printer s EtherTalk zone name Open the file in a text editor and change name of zone in the parentheses to the name of your EtherTalk zone Save the file and download it to your printer The printer must be restarted before the change is effective Startpg ps allows you to print the printer s start up page Startpgoff ps disables the printer s start up page feature which prevents it from printing automatically each time the printer is restarted See Printing a Start up Page in chapter 1 for details Startpgon ps enables the start up page feature which causes a page to print automatically each time the printer is restarted See Printing a Start up Page in chapter 1 for details Sysparm ps prints a list of current system parameters Using the Browser Feature Access You can access many printer features using your browser and the printer s home page utilities The next sections cover going to the home page and accessing printer features options and information available there Printer Home Page To access your printer s home page 1 Turn on your printer and then the computer PC Setup 3 43 WW You must assign the printer a valid IP address for you network before you can use the AS browser NOTE 2 Open your browser and enter your printer s IP address This address appea
262. ter Driver and Printer PPD Installation OS 9 in chapter 2 Macintosh or Installing AdobePS Printer Driver and Printer PPD in chapter 3 PC Make sure the printer s Ethernet interface is configured properly for your operating environment See Configuring EtherTalk in chapter 2 and see Network EtherTalk General and TCP IP Configuration in chapter 2 Macintosh or 3 PC Make sure the Macintosh or PC is configured properly to communicate using the Ethernet connection See Configuring EtherTalk in chapter 2 and see Network EtherTalk General and TCP IP Configuration in chapter 2 Macintosh or 3 PC Make sure the printer is on line Make sure the network is available Reduce the number of items on the network to determine the source of the problem Make sure that you are using a crossover or UTP test cable if your are using twisted pair cable to direct connect a printer and a Ethernet configured host without a hub Do not use a transceiver that allows devices to daisy chain on a twisted pair network When I print an image that I have scanned it is so dark that much of the detail is lost Adjust the printer s gamma setting to change the image s midrange grayscale values See Halftone Calibration Technology Gamma in chapter 4 Rescan the image with a higher resolution Generally black and white images should be scanned at a resolution of 2 times the line screen desired on th
263. tes according to procedures in chapter 1 fig 7 4 Fig 7 4 Install Second Paper Cassette Removing the Paper Cassette Feeder 1 4 Make sure the printer displays a Please Wait or Ready Idle message Then turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord from the power supply Remove media from the multipurpose feeder and the output tray then close the multipurpose feeder Remove all paper cassettes from the printer Pull each cassette out until it stops Lift up slightly and remove it from the printer Remove the screws that secure the feeder to the printer fig 7 3 The printer weighs approximately 58 5 lbs 26 5 kg without toner cassettes and media installed Always have two people lift the printer using the recessed grip areas on the right and left sides 5 Lift the printer off the feeder vertically until the printer is free of the feeder s stubs fig 7 2 Set the printer on a stable surface that will support its weight Repack the feeder in its original box and store it in a location that meets the guidelines in Printer Location in chapter 1 Set the printer up again following the instructions in chapter 1 Options 7 3 Controller Board Upgrades RAM 2400 dpi resolution NEIT includes Positive Film Technology and internal IDE hard disk upgrades are controller board modifications This section covers installing RAM memory and IDE upgrades the 2400 dpi resolution is a factory
264. the film may not burn correctly While the default film setting is 10 you can experiment with the EP1 setting to create the best possible output from your printer Also when printing film be sure to set your fuser temperature low set Fuser Temperature later in this chapter for details Fast Imaging Adobe PostScript 3 s Fast Imaging feature allows you to select from two methods of image data compression for faster printing when image quality is not the primary concern Set Fast Imaging from your application Print dialog box None the factory default prints at normal speed and with no data compression Optimized for Quality compresses image data for faster printing than normal but with some usually not noticeable loss of image quality Optimized for Speed implements a greater degree of data compression to provide the fastest print time but with the possibility of a noticeable loss of data quality R Optimize selections do not function if the print job contains an image that is masked sA or rotated to anything other than 0 90 180 or 270 Font Accelerator Font Accelerator allows you to set aside a portion of RAM disk to store fonts for quick system access Font Accelerator automatically loads the most recently used fonts from the printer s optional hard disk into the RAM disk This eliminates time usually required to access fonts from the hard disk The Font Accelerator menu is active only if fonts are downloaded
265. the toner cartridge out of the printer remove the cartridge completely The drum shutter may not open properly if the cartridge is partially pulled out and then pushed back in This can damage the cartridge or result in a malfunction Ew Place the toner cartridge flat on a level surface To prevent stains protect the surface EM XA with old newspapers or cloth Follow all procedures in Handling the Toner Cartridge in chapter 1 Troubleshooting 8 17 2 Remove any jammed media from the back of the multipurpose feeder and from the toner cartridge area fig 8 15 Fig 8 15 Remove Media Jam from Toner Cartridge Area Clearing a Paper Exit Area Jam The fuser becomes very hot during operation Do not touch any area with a high temperature warning label fig 8 16 without first turning off the printer and allowing it to cool for at least 20 minutes RY When the printer is turned off all print job information still in memory is lost the ANN sA Jam Recover feature cannot print the last page processed AX CAUTION A VORSICHT A A HIGH TEMPERATURE HEIZUNGSROLLEN SEHR HEISS ATTENTION dori TEMPERATURE ELEVEE Aamo i ao auraTewpenatuna BRER ADVERTENCIA TEMPERATURA ELEVADA Fig 8 16 Fuser Warning Label 6 16 Troubleshooting 1 Open the fuser cover by pulling it toward the back of the printer fig 8 17 Fig 8 17 Open
266. ties capacity varies depending on type of media Installation Installation covers selecting a printer location as well as unpacking becoming familiar with and connecting your printer Introduction and Installation 1 5 Printer Location Set up your printer in a location that can support its weight and can provide sufficient operation and maintenance clearance To prevent overheating allow at least 8 0 200 mm clearance for the printer s vent Install the printer in a location that provides A horizontal sturdy and Good ventilation A stable environment stable surface Temperature range 50 90 F 10 32 C Humidity range 15 85 Do not install the printer in locations where it will be Exposed to direct air currents Subject to magnetic fields Subject to extreme variations in temperature and humidity Fig 1 2 Location Guidelines Printer Package Unpack the printer saving the packing materials 1 Remove the items packed on top of the printer The printer weighs approximately 58 5 Ib 26 5 kg without the toner cassettes and media installed Always have two people lift the printer Only lift the printer using the recessed grip areas on the right and left sides 1 6 Introduction and Installation 2 Remove the shipping stabilizer from the top of the printer then lift the printer out of the box fig 1 3 Fig 1 3 Lifting the Printer 3 Remove the plastic wr
267. tility Language configuration menu English is the factory default other options are Spanish Espa ol French Francais German Deutsch and Japanese Katakana Lines Per Inch LPI Lines per inch settings allow you to control the number of gray levels and enhance the resolution quality of your printed images Usually you set lines per inch through your application or you can use the LPI option in your XANTE browser utilities However when LPI is not a software option you can use the front panel Graphic Lpi configuration menu Line screen options range from 5 to 210 lines per inch with a factory default of 85 lpi Media Types Media Types options in the front panel allow you to select the default media and set configurations for specific media The Media Types Cassette menu allows you to select the default media for your printer Media options are Paper the factory default Transparency Cover Stock Label Stock Paper Plate Polyester Plate Matte Film Clear Film Heavy Paper and five user defined types of media FR Throughout this document all references to media are shown as Paper the factory sA default The same menu settings apply to Transparency Cover Stock Label Stock Paper Plate Polyester Plate Matte Film Clear Film Heavy Paper and five user defined types of media The Media Types Configure menu allows you to select media types as well as to configure that media s fuser temperature through a Fuser submenu
268. tion Window 7 Type your name and or your company s name in the spaces provided fig 3 72 then click Next The Name Confirmation window appears fig 3 73 8 After making sure your information is correct click Yes fig 3 73 The Select Components window appears fig 3 74 eminentem ea ed oru alliprurai rmi sira msme ra oy mac ums Jo ranas na iere mtu rid oe DATI Nr in Loud Er biii T reir Fig 3 74 Select Components Window Fig 3 75 Select Program Folder Window 9 Select which components you wish to install to a particular directory fig 3 74 then click Next The Select Program Folder window appears fig 3 75 10 Select the folder s into which you want the program icons added fig 3 75 then click Next The Start Copying Files window appears fig 3 76 3 36 PC Setup pum LL es ea ad ag TI Lin an ae opes B emi bip t Tisi Tret ea ccm Hag Imm m Fig 3 76 Start Copying Files Window Fig 3 77 Setup Complete Window 11 Review the Start Copying Files window carefully fig 3 76 If there are any changes you wish to make simply click Back If you are satisfied click Next Once files are copied the Setup Complete window appears fig 3 77 12 This window indicates the setup is complete check center box if you wish to see the ATM ReadMe file if not click Finish XANT Advanced Graphics Center The XANT Advanced Graphics Center allows you to check and control More X ACT an
269. to enable the DHCP protocol Factory ps allows you to reset the printer parameters to factory defaults Fonts ps prints a list of Adobe PostScript 3 fonts resident on XANTE PostScript 3 printers Fontsamp ps prints samples of Adobe PostScript 3 fonts resident on XANTE PostScript 3 printers Initdsk ps files are used to initialize hard disk installed in your printer yc A hard disk must be initialized before it can be used to store downloaded fonts Initializing a disk erases all information stored on that disk y PS Netduplex ps allows you to configure the network duplex setting to Auto Full Duplex or Half Duplex Netpgoff ps allows you to disable printing the network page which lists protocol settings for EtherTalk IP IPP and LPR as well as Ethernet physical settings 3 42 PC Setup Netpgon ps allows you to enable printing the network page which lists protocol settings for EtherTalk IP IPP and LPR as well as Ethernet physical settings Parmdump ps prints a list of current settings for the communication devices configured for your printer Prnipsub ps allows you to print the IP address subnet mask and default gateway Ramdisk ps allows the user to set the size of the ramdisk feature Setip ps allows you to set your printer s IP address Open the file in a text editor and change the IP address in the parentheses to your printer s IP address Save the file and download it to your printer The printer must be restar
270. to provide the fastest print time but with the possibility of a noticeable loss of data quality Ky Optimize selections do not function if the print job contains an image that is masked sA or rotated to anything other than 0 90 180 or 270 Gamma The Gamma feature allows you to adjust printer output for ink media file and environmental conditions For example if a scanned image is too dark you can select a new gamma setting to lighten and enhance the details XANTE provides seven standard gamma curves available through the Gamma menu in the Print dialog box Gamma curves 1 through 5 progressively lighten the midrange values in an image Gamma 0 the factory default makes no change to the image and Gamma 6 produces a reverse negative image without changing the image in the application Graphs in figure 2 45 show the change to the midrange gray levels ig Gamma 2 Gamma2 We Gamma3 Hi Gamma4 Output Levels Back e input Levels cy ask input Levels wd RA MRE H Gamma5 7 Gamma 6 Fig 2 45 Gamma Corrections O through 6 2 20 Macintosh Setup You also can use the front panel options to control gamma For details see Halftone Calibration Technology Gamma in chapter 4 Depending on the application used a Printer s Default option may be available When eA this option is selected the current printer setting is used for the job Media Weight Media Weigh
271. u Structure Configuration menus allow you to configure many printer feature and interface defaults The main configuration menu groups are Media Utility Graphic and Interfaces Use Media menus to configure the printer for the type of media being used Use Utility menus to set printer feature defaults Use Graphic menus to control advanced graphic features and use the Interfaces menus to set printer network defaults The PPD The PostScript Printer Description PPD allows you to select many printer feature settings from your application s Print dialog box These settings override printer default and other software settings You can customize printer features for each job or for all jobs sent to the printer from your host without resetting printer front panel menus 4 4 Configuration For these options to be available the Adobe PostScript printer driver and your printer s PPD must be installed and configured properly See chapter 2 Macintosh or 3 PC for details Usually printer specific options in the PPD are accessed through the Device Options tab Windows 98 and Me the Device Settings tab Windows NT 2000 and XP and the Printer Specific Options menu on a Macintosh Selecting PPD Options Macintosh To configure a printer feature from the Print dialog box 1 Install and configure the AdobePS printer driver and your printer s PPD following the instructions in chapter 2 2 Choose File Print The Print dialog box appe
272. ude the appropriate number or address Troubleshooting 8 21 If you have access to the internet you can access XANTE s web page at www xante com From this site you can download printer drivers software and PPDs as well as access other technical information 000 6 22 Troubleshooting Glossary 10 100BaseT An IEEE Ethernet cabling standard using UTP unshielded twisted pair cable The prefix of the name 10 100 defines the transmission speed of the cable as 10 or 100 Megabits per second Base indicates that the signal is a baseband transmission and T indicates the cable type twisted pair See also Unshielded Twisted Pair AppleTalk Network Multiple computers and or peripheral devices which are connected and adhere to the AppleTalk communication protocol Application Software Any software program such as a desktop publishing program word processing program graphics program or any program that is installed in your computer system Banding Three meanings in this manual s context 1 visible changes of shading in a gradient print 2 lines that appear in a printed image due to ink drying between print passes 3 the method of processing image data in sections Bitmapped Image An image created by placement of individual dots or pixels on a grid In contrast vector images are created by specifying the point locations and the description of the lines between these points Blanket On offset presses a fabric reinf
273. ult NEIT settings for each media type See Negative Enhanced Imaging Technology NEIT in chapter 4 for more details This NEIT feature can be used only if you are printing a negative to Matte Film AS 1 Go to the printer home page fig 3 2122 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details EE S Fig 3 122 Printer Home Page Fig 3 123 Default NEIT Settings Window 2 Select Printer Configuration Print Quality NEIT fig 3 122 The Default NEIT Settings window appears fig 3 123 PC Setup 3 59 3 Select Matte Film from the Media Type drop down menu fig 3 123 Then click Change 4 Select the desired NEIT setting from the NEIT drop down menu fig 3 123 Options are 0 Dark 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 the factory default 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 and 20 Light Then click Change 5 Close the browser Print Density This feature allows you to adjust the density of toner on your printed page Density options range from 0 light to 7 dark in increments of one The factory default is 4 1 Goto the printer home page fig 3 124 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details MANTE n 5 Le i TT xil Fig 3 124 Printer Home Page Fig 3 125 Print Density Window 2 Select Printer Configuration Print Quality Print Density fig 3 124 The Print Density window appears fig 3 125 3 Select the density level for your printer T
274. ultipurpose feeder supports non standard size media including envelopes from 3 94 x 5 83 100 mm x 148 mm to 13 00 x 35 50 330 mm x 902 mm This feeder can handle media weights from 16 36 Ib 60 155 g m2 A Make sure all media used meets the guidelines in Media Specifications in chapter 5 Introduction and Installation 1 13 To load the multipurpose feeder 1 Open the multipurpose feeder by grasping the cover s top center handle and pulling down fig 1 23 A The multipurpose feeder does not open to a 90 angle To prevent damage do not exert strong pressure or place heavy objects on the feeder Fig 1 23 Open Multipurpose Feeder Fig 1 24 Pull Out Tray Extension 2 Pull out the tray extension for media larger than letter A4 size fig 1 24 3 Align the edges of the paper stack and load it into the cassette print side up leading edge toward the back of the printer fig 1 25 See Media Sources in chapter 5 to determine whether to load media short or long edge first A To prevent jams make sure the media fits under the media guide s retaining clips fig 1 25 Fig 1 25 Load Paper Fig 1 26 Adjust Media Guide 4 Adjust the media guide to the size of the media stack fig 1 26 1 14 Introduction and Installation Multipurpose Feeder Tip Occasionally in a Macintosh environment if media is in the multipurpose feeder the system s Print Monitor sends a promp
275. umbered from 0 to 255 You may have to check several b v4 blocks to find the one that most closely matches the percentage in the Densitometer Data Entry window Also it is not necessary to measure for each coverage value but that is recommended to achieve more accurate results NOTE g Click Linearize fig 3 105 To verify linearization click the Print Verification Page button fig 3 106 and then click Print before you close the Linearization window When this page prints compare it to the original calibration page to verify the gamma correction you should see an improvement in gray scale progression ES 4 Close your browser LPI Default Setting LPI options allow you set the default Lines Per Inch Ipi on your printer 1 Go to the printer home page fig 3 108 See Printer Home Page earlier in this chapter for details 3 52 PC Setup Szil umi Fig 3 108 Printer Home Page Fig 3 109 Default LP Window 2 Select Printer Configuration PostScript LPI fig 3 108 The Default LPI window appears fig 3 109 3 Select the desired LPI for your printer from the Default LPI drop down menu fig 3 109 Options go from 5 to 210 in single increments the factory default is 85 LPI Then click Change 4 Close your browser Margins Printer Margin Adjustment The PostScript Margins feature allows you to adjust your PostScript printer margins so that your images will be positioned exactly on the page 1 G
276. use this menu in the Print dialog box rather than an application setting True enables this feature and False the factory default disables it Optimized Output For The Optimize Output For feature allows you to choose between Quality the factory default and Speed When quality output is more important than the printing speed select Quality When speed is the more important select Speed but be aware that output quality may be slightly lower Depending on the application being used a Printer s Default option may be available When this option is selected the current printer setting is used for the job Screen LPI The Screen LPI lines per inch feature allow you to control the number of gray levels and enhance the resolution quality of your printed image PC Setup 3 15 Usually you set lines per inch through your application However when LPI is not a software option you can use the Screen option provided by your printer s PPD in the Print dialog box Options include 30 LPI 75 LPI 85 LPI 95 LPI 110 LPI 115 120 and 133 LPI KY Depending on the application being used a Printer s Default option may be available sA When this option is selected the current printer setting is used for the job Screen Shape Dot Shapes The Screen Shape feature allows you to select the shape of dots that make up the screen pattern for your printed image This feature is controlled by your printer s PPD that is loaded on your system duri
277. ve these pins uncovered Options 7 11 Fig 7 22 Connect IDE Cable to Hard Disk Fig 7 23 Connect IDE Cable to Controller Board b Push the female IDE cable connector securely into the male IDE hard disk connector fig 7 22 Then push the IDE cable s free connector end securely into the controller board s connector fig 7 23 Reinstalling the Controller Board 1 Reinstall the controller board into its housing fig 7 19 a Insert the top edge of the controller board into the controller housing followed by the bottom edge b Tilt the right side of the board out making sure the video connection clears the back of the housing and slide the board unit left until the tabs on the metal back plate can be inserted behind the metal tabs on the housing c Slide the board right until the tabs on the metal back plate are secured behind the metal tabs on the housing d Slide the board right until the tabs on the metal back plate are secured behind the metal tabs on the housing e Replace the seven screws fig 7 18 securing the board to the housing 2 Reinstall the Controller Assembly fig 7 17 a Align the controller assembly next to the left side of the printer 7 12 Options Slide the power cord up through its opening in the bottom of the controller assembly making sure to align the cord s purple ground wire to the right below the minus sign and the cord s purple wire is to the left below the plus
278. vertically or horizontally in an inch In this manual s context it is a measurement of the resolution of a printer See also Resolution Drift The small changes in measurement capabilities of an instrument For example over time a monitor can drift in its ability to produce a 100 red because of age environment usage and other factors Calibration brings the instrument back in line with standard color measurements Enhanced Screen Technology XANTE technology that optimizes the line screen for an image The line screen is based on the printer s resolution and the number of gray levels selected Ethernet Specification for the physical and data link layers of the OSI Reference Model Originally developed by Xerox and jointly promoted by DEC Intel and Xerox DIX for local area networks Ethernet was adopted by IEEE as the basis for the 802 networking standards EtherTalk The AppleTalk protocols transmitted over Ethernet media Factory Default Settings Settings programmed into the printer at the factory such as English as the default display window language Printer default settings can be changed using the front panel and XANTE Utilities available online through your browser See also Default Settings Family The group name of the typeface which identifies the typeface s distinctive shape Typeface families are often named after their designers John Baskerville Frederick Goudy they can suggest how a typeface may be used
279. verts to Remove Then click Remove 8 Click Install fig 2 60 A warning window may appear which allows you to quit other running applications Then a message window recommends you restart your computer after installing the software fig 2 61 The metallatiga Penn ens vau restart yaur compuier ater inuialliag ts LAG TOE Ais ee ee YE Falun AE valtware Click Darf ip autematicalty Aare wich ORES ont Pe eT VOR EEA you acu feted click Baart or ri ck Quid ieee iha pajmim Hynes seii no erie aera mquit Sather rarmming apsliatism Dick CADE Te Minos peni aL Uae hea imiakinti sm chert Cumbre Tamai continue a a Cae Fig 2 61 Restart Recommendation Window Fig 2 62 Installation Was Successful Window 9 Click Continue fig 2 61 When installation is complete an Installation Was Successful window appears fig 2 62 10 Click Restart if you are finished click Quit to leave the Installer or click Continue if you wish to perform additional installations fig 2 62 Install PS3Fonts You can install the screen fonts for the Adobe PostScript 3 fonts on your printer from the XANT Utilities via the Utilities menu or via the Adobe PS3Fonts option under Software Utilities 1l Insert the XANT Utilities CD ROM into your Macintosh The Main Installation window should open automatically fig 2 63 If not double click the CD ROM icon then double click the Setup icon 2 28 Macintosh Setup aU
280. vy Depending on the application used a Printer s Default option may be available A Smooth Shading Smooth Shading allows you to use the Adobe PostScript 3 method of rendering gradient blends Smooth Shading produces the highest quality image at the selected resolution For some images PostScript files created with Smooth Shading are smaller and print faster than those created using PostScript Level 2 Set Smooth Shading from your application Print dialog box Off the factory default disables this feature Options of Maximum High Medium Low are available 2 22 Macintosh Setup Additional Printer Specific Options for Adobe PageMaker Several additional printer specific options are available through PageMaker s Printer Features in the Print dialog box They include TraySwitch Installed Memory and Optional Tray TraySwitch Tray Chaining R Tray chaining only applies to the standard and installed optional cassettes It does not EmA apply to the multipurpose tray TraySwitch allows you to select the printer s tray chaining feature on a per job basis Tray chaining on your printer is controlled via the printer s PPD Tray Switch feature Options are False which disables chaining and True which enables it When True is selected your printer automatically switches to another media source when the current source runs out of media as long as the following conditions are met All selected media sources must contain the same size med
281. wing appropriate step a Ifyou selected Yes the Properties Device Options window appears fig 3 17 continue to step 6 b Ifyouselected No the Setup Complete window appears fig 3 18 skip to step 8 m r Ae vin et oe ea Fig 3 17 Properties Device Options Window Fig 3 18 Setup Complete Window 6 Configure the printer by selecting each tab and setting the appropriate options for your system setup a Make the following changes for options installed on your printer by first highlighting the option in the Installable Options section then select the setting under Change setting for 3 8 PC Setup 1 Select Installed for the Optional Tray optional paper feeder if that upgrade was added to your printer 2 Select the amount of RAM installed on your printer using the VMOption b Click the PostScript tab fig 3 19 carcere ks aed raperi header h cach peni pis T Aue hades eierinacisd and paianad Gerad Header Hin Fig 3 19 PostScript Tab 1 In the PostScript output format box select PostScript optimized for speed if you have a Pentium processor If not select PostScript optimized for portability ADSC 2 Under PostScript header select Download header with each print job 3 Under PostScript timeout values make sure the settings are Job timeout 0 Wait timeout 240 7 Click OK The Printer Properties window closes and the Setup Complete window appears fig 3 18
282. xample if Line B is 389 mm instead of 388 61 mm as it should be select 0 50 mm to shorten the line to 388 50 7 Press the Reset key to return to the previous menu level Then press the Menu key until XACT TEST PAGE reappears and press the Enter key to print a new test page 4 10 Configuration 8 Repeat steps 5 and 6 until the line measurements agree with the lengths listed on the test page 9 Press the On Line key when the line lengths are correct READY IDLE appears in the window Now the printer s line lengths are calibrated correctly Accurate Screens To maximize processing resources your printer calculates the line screen from lpi and angle settings similar but not necessarily identical to the settings specified in your application The Accurate Screens feature allows you to override this approximation and use the exact settings specified in your application to calculate the line screen When this feature is enabled there may be an increase in processing time because of additional demand on printer resources Set Accurate Screens from your application Print dialog box False the factory default disables Accurate Screens and uses the printer s standard line screen calculation True allows the printer to build the line screen based on the specific lpi and angle settings in your application Accurate Screens is active in the PPD only if the Enhanced Screens menu is set to Normal rA X If you have not
283. y UAM ens Lu Peres srate 11 LIT TER Vaid ipe iae Ramsau Buaem Leer pei Pay Bacca ed e i ae Fig 2 18 Paper Feed Options 12 Set other printer features Copies amp Pages Layout Output Options etc by selecting them from the Print Window fig 2 16 drop down menu Y To save these settings made in this procedure as the defaults for all print jobs select b 4 Save Custom Setting from the Print window drop down menu fig 2 16 NOTE 13 Click Print The test file prints verifying that your printer is installed correctly Configuring Your Printer from an OS X System You can configure your printer by selecting Page Setup and Printer Features 1 Double click on your hard drive icon Macintosh Setup 2 9 2 Locate and double click the Installer Log File fig 2 19 h 1 4 s Hi E 1 EGE EF ciaxr zipi 08 2 a c lama m Iu Ld quemar i P ix mil L miaii Lan Fe ans dig Bl am T um Fig 2 19 Locate Installer Log File 3 Select File Page Setup fig 2 20 The Page Setup Window appears fig 2 21 tien Page Sivas wh Eorna fer me DAR Piin 7 Yor ARTE Pees PET tot ion ET V5 Lega Tah sad CL is Ledger Faeroe ras Tp see Ad 1 aa m mnm lere rad Ch relase wid Greig Long ranpa Hamn Lesion Fig 2 21 Page Setup Window 4 Select your printer from the Format For menu fig 2 21 your printer s PPD should be listed If
284. your choice up to 8 characters in length in the New Password field fig 2 160 or fig 2 161 then reenter that new password in the Re enter Password field 4 Click submit you now can access the secure webpage areas When you are through select Printer Security Logout fig 2 160 The Logout window appears fig 2 158 5 Click Submit Then close the browser This new password will be required every time you log on to your printer s web page Change Reset the Password If you wish to change your password or have forgotten it you can reset it by using the following sequence from the Printer Security section fig 2 160 LOGIN LOGOUT LOGIN HOME LOGIN SET PASSWORD Simply go these pages in this order to reset your password Then follow the steps on how to set the password from the previous section Utility Pages The Utility Pages option allows you to print the following four utility pages Start Page prints a page with basic printer information such as the printer s current name resolution page count amount of installed RAM number of resident fonts EtherTalk and LPR status and the Ethernet and IP addresses Low Toner Page prints a toner reorder form which you can fill out and return to XANT or your XANT vendor Network Page prints a page listing current network EtherTalk IP IPP LPR and Ethernet physical settings Font List Page prints a list of the Adobe PostScript 3 fonts resident on your
285. ything on top of the printer Always lift the printer by the recessed grip areas on the bottom never by the cartridge slot or multipurpose feeder Only use media that meets printer requirements See Media Specifications in chapter 5 for details Make sure the printer s location meets the requirements in Printer Location in chapter 1 Never oil the printer Allow the printer side vent at least 8 0 200 mm clearance to prevent overheating Never insert anything into the vent Make sure the output tray does not overfill Overfilling can block media as it comes out and cause a printer jam Check the power cord and plug monthly and replace it immediately if you find any damage Storing the Printer Use the following procedure when storing the printer for an extended period Maintenance and Specifications 6 1 Turn off the printer Unplug the power cord from the power source Remove all media from the multipurpose feeder Close the multipurpose feeder and if necessary the top cover See chapter 1 for instructions Store the printer and media properly a Store the printer and media in an area with a temperature of 32 to 95 F 0 to 35 C and a relative humidity of 15 to 80 with no condensation b Store the printer and media in the original containers or cover them to protect from dust Moving the Printer Use the following procedure when moving the printer The printer weighs approximately 58 5 Ibs

Xante FilmMaker 4 Printer

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents